JP2020078368A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with increased game interest.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 1 can execute a specific performance (e.g., next notice, etc.), a first performance (e.g., active notice), a second performance (e.g., a cut-in notice), and a third performance. For the execution ratio of the second performance, a case when the first performance is executed and the specific performance is executed is higher than a case when the specific performance is executed without executing the first performance, and a case when the third performance is executed and the specific performance is executed is the same as a case when the specific performance is executed without executing the third performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a specific effect (for example, super reach or an effect using an accessory) can be executed, and a predetermined effect (for example, a sub icon “SP” or “an accessory”) can be performed before the specific effect. A game machine capable of executing (display of) is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-230760, A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the execution pattern of the effect is monotonous, and there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest of the game.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in games.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 12AK),
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a specific effect (for example, next notice),
First effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a first effect (for example, active notice) before the specific effect,
Second effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect before the specific effect;
A third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) third effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12, etc.),
The execution ratio of the second effect is
It is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-9). ,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (see, for example, FIG. 8-9). ,
further,
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notifying unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-2(D) or FIG. 11-2(F). Part to display the title of reach production),
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. (A part that displays the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the reach D)
It is characterized by

  According to the above configuration, the interest of the game is improved. Further, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
As modes of the first effect, a first mode that directly suggests the specific effect (for example, a mode in which the next notice icon 12AK001 is added) and a second mode that does not directly suggest the specific effect (for example, Next time the icon 12AK001 will not be added),
The execution rate of the specific effect is higher when the aspect of the first effect is the first aspect than when it is the second aspect (for example, the active notice is executed and the next notice icon 12AK001 is displayed. When the active notice is executed and the next notice icon 12AK001 is not displayed, the next notice may be executed more easily).
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
As modes of the second effect, a first mode that directly suggests the specific effect (for example, display of a character for the next notice) and a second mode that does not directly suggest the specific effect (for example, character A Or B), etc.
When the mode of the second effect is the first mode, the execution rate of the specific effect is higher than when the mode of the second mode (for example, when the character of the next notice is displayed, the character A or (The next notice is easier to execute than when B is displayed.),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The third effect can be executed at a specific timing (for example, timing during normal reach when super reach is executed),
The execution ratio of the third effect at the specific timing is the same when the gaming machine is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player and when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 8-8). , See FIGS. 8-11),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The first effect is executed before the second effect (see, for example, FIG. 8-11),
The third effect can be executed at at least one of a plurality of timings (for example, an execution period) (see, for example, FIG. 8-11),
The plurality of timings includes at least an execution timing before the execution timing of the second effect (see, for example, FIG. 8-11 ),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, the embodiment of the invention described below includes the invention according to (6) below. Conventionally, in some gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-101428, at the start of the reach effect, a title display for informing the type of the reach effect has been performed. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is desired to enhance the effect of presentation, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of presentation.

In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine according to (6) of the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notifying unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-2(D) or FIG. 11-2(F). Part to display the title of reach production),
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-2(H), (A part that displays the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the reach D)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the notification of the title can be executed according to the suggestion effect, the effect of the effect is improved.

  Note that the present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for explaining a variation pattern and a kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the execution timing example of each production. It is a figure showing an example of production of an active notice. It is a figure showing an example of production of a cut-in notice. It is the figure which shows the production example of the character production, next notice and super reach. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure which shows the execution determination example of a next notice. It is a figure showing an example of execution decision of an accessory production. It is a figure which shows the execution determination example of an active notice. It is a figure which shows the execution determination example of a cut-in notice. (A) is a diagram showing an example of execution timing of each effect. (B) is a figure showing an example of execution decision of explanation production. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. which concern on another characteristic part. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine according to another feature. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production control command which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value used as the game random number which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit classification determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for game controls which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows arrangement|positioning of a display monitor and the display content which concern on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the storage area which memorize|stores the number of prize balls which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the memory map which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the built-in RAM area which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the example of control of the display in the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the buffer update which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a rear perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a rear perspective view which shows the state which opened the game machine frame in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the state control example which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning other feature parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect control which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing in the modification concerning other feature parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ongoing setting confirmation process in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the output amount changeover switch which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the initial setting control which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of the alerting|reporting regarding the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display concerning the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning feature 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of output switching processing at the time of starting concerning characteristic part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output change process in progress which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect control in the modification concerning the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the initial operation which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a figure which shows the control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power activation which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power-on in the modification concerning the feature part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of power-on command processing concerning the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the setting confirmation notification screen which concerns on the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|generation control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning the characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the confirmation production control processing concerning the characteristic part 74AK. It is a timing diagram etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation production which concerns on the characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning the characteristic part 75AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of confirmation production control processing during a change concerning a characteristic part 75AK. It is a timing diagram etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation production which concerns on the characteristic part 75AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control process processing concerning the feature part 100AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting suggestion production start process which concerns on the characteristic part 100AK, and the kind of timer which concerns on the characteristic part 100AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the kind of setting suggestion production which concerns on the characteristic part 100AK, the kind of production pattern of setting suggestion production, and the determination rate of the production pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting suggestion production execution processing concerning characteristic part 100AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation operation|movement which concerns on the characteristic part 100AK. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the determination rate in a notice production determination process. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a special symbol display device. It is a figure showing the shift mode of the 1st reservation indicator and the 2nd reservation indicator. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a round indicator. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern judgment table for big hits (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for loss. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a figure which shows the display mode of a display monitor, (C) is explanatory drawing of a display content. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows a display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of an error in the set value error or when the system is restored from the power interruption during the setting change. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display device during the setting change process, and (B) is a setting value error error, or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a special symbol display device at the time of returning from the power failure during a setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of timer interrupt process for game controls. It is the flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information memorize|stored in RAM and the state cleared. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of starting a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of non-detection operation control and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in operation|movement of non-detection operation control and operation control for real operation confirmation. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the change timing of the set value and the confirmation end timing of the set value, and the number of times the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value change processing in the characteristic part 10F. 7 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the characteristic unit 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop start processing in characteristic part 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop end processing in characteristic part 10F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. In addition, the total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, which are configured to include a plurality of LEDs, are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is moved. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit symbol" is reached and the big hit symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing symbol".

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

  In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.) the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure changing time (period during which the special figure is changed) is executed as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of the times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

  A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

  As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

  In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special drawing game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss"). (Also referred to as) fixed display may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "reach lost").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display is simulated like a plurality of variable displays. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit midfield effect, an effect that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion effect that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, in some big hit type (the big hit type of big hit game state of the manner similar to the small hit game state, for example, big hit type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) big hit game By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-precision state and the low-precision state. You may.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

  The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches for detecting the game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), the status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

  It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being recovered from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, and the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) is output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the general figure reservation display unit 25C is turned on to display the number of general figure reservations.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the look-ahead determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" when the big hit type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

  When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values that are compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random number value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not reach, etc.), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". When the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The processing during the big hit opening ends.

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. Then, when the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

  The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

  After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting processing, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect display processing during variable display ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command is not received without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hitting production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small winning game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

  The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description was a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are installed.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 12AK)
Next, the characteristic part 12AK of the present embodiment will be described.

(Structure, operation, etc. of the characteristic part 12AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows a variation pattern used in the characteristic part 12AK. As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the characteristic portion 12AK, the variable patterns PA1-1, PA2-1, and the decorative patterns of the non-reach lost pattern in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “miss” The variation pattern PA3-2 to PA3-4 that the display result is "miss" and the variation pattern PB3-2 to PB3-4 that the display result is "big hit" It is prepared. The fluctuation patterns PA3-2 and PB3-2 specify execution of normal reach, PA3-3 and PB3-3 specify execution of super reach A, and PA3-4 and PB3-4 execute execution of super reach B. Is specified. The expectation level (big hit expectation level) when each reach (reach effect) is executed increases in the order of normal reach<super reach A<super reach B. In this embodiment, super reach (also called SP reach) is executed via normal reach (also called N reach). That is, super reach is executed by developing from normal reach.

  In the characteristic portion 12AK, in addition to the reach effect, effects such as an active notice, a cut-in notice, a character effect, and a next notice are executed. 8-2 shows the execution timing of each effect, and FIGS. 8-3 to 8-5 show the effect mode of each effect. The movable body 32 shown in FIG. 8-3 and the like is rotatably provided with the lower portion as a rotation axis. The movable body 32 is rotated by a drive mechanism including a motor and gears. The operation of the movable body 32 is controlled by the display control unit 123. Specifically, the display controller 123 operates (rotates) the movable body 32 via a drive circuit (a circuit that drives a drive mechanism) and the drive mechanism (not shown).

  The active notice is executed before the reach is established (FIG. 8-2) and is an effect (FIG. 8-3) of changing the display mode of the active display 5HA. The active display 5HA is a display corresponding to the variable display being executed, and the hold display 5HR or 5HL corresponding to the variable display at which execution is started is moved and enlarged, and the center of the lower portion of the display screen of the image display device 5 is expanded. Is displayed as an active display 5HA. Specifically, the active notice changes the display color of the active display 5HA (the normal color before change is white) (FIG. 8-3(B)). Further, the active notice may add a next notice icon 12AK001 (a balloon of “next notice” from the active display 5HA) indicating that the next notice will be executed to the active display 5HA (FIG. 8-3 ( B)). In this way, the active notice changes the display mode of the active display 5HA (the addition of the next notice icon 12AK001 is also included in the change of the display mode). In the characteristic part 12AK, the jackpot expectation degree (percentage of "big hit") of the variable display being executed according to the display mode of the active display 5HA (particularly, the display color after the execution of the active notification and the presence or absence of the next notification icon 12AK001) And the execution expectation of the next notice (the rate at which the next notice is executed) is different (details will be described later). The active notice may be changed after the predetermined image is applied to the active display 5HA (the active display 5HA is reached (contact, etc.)) even in the mode in which the active display 5HA is changed without any notice (in this case, the display of the active display 5HA is displayed. The active notice of the failure mode in which the mode is not changed may be prepared separately). The display mode of the active display 5HA changed (also referred to as "changed") by the active notice is maintained even after the active notice is finished (after the display mode is changed).

  The cut-in notice is executed during normal reach (after reaching reach, before developing into super reach, etc.) (Fig. 8-2). The cut-in notice execution timing (execution period. Has a time width. The same applies hereinafter) is after the active notice execution timing. The cut-in notice is an effect in which a cut irrelevant to the flow of the effect being executed is inserted (cut-in) (Fig. 8-4). In the cut, one of “Character A” 12A002 (FIG. 8-4(A)), “Character B” (not shown), and “Next Advance Notice Character” 12AK003 (FIG. 8-4(B)). Is displayed. "Character A" 12A002 and "Character B" are characters that do not have the characters "Next notice!" Is a character displayed on the face or body (directly suggesting the next notice). When the cut-in notice is executed, the big hit expectation degree of the variable display being executed and the execution expectation degree of the next notice differ depending on the type of the character displayed in the cut-in notice (details will be described later). The cut-in notice is executed instead of part of the normal reach production.

  The accessory production is executed during the normal reach and after the execution timing of the cut-in notice (FIG. 8-2). The accessory effect is an effect of moving the movable body 32 during normal reach (FIG. 8-5(A)) (FIG. 8-5(B)). The accessory production is a production that suggests that the current normal reach will develop into a super reach. The accessory production is executed in place of part of the normal reach production. The execution ratio of the character effect will be described later.

  The next notice is executed during the normal reach and after the execution timing of the character effect (in particular, immediately after the character effect is executed or when the character reaches the super reach) (FIG. 8-2). The next notice will be the production contents of super-reach (may be the super-reach that develops after that, or the production contents of a randomly-selected super-reach regardless of whether it develops thereafter) Is an effect for notifying (introducing) (FIG. 8-5(C)). After the next notice is executed, super reach is executed (Fig. 8-5(D)). The next notice has a big hit expectation degree that is separate from Super Reach. The next notice will be executed instead of part of the normal reach production. In addition, when the normal reach is changed to the super reach (at the end of the normal reach), the development effect for notifying the development to the super reach may be executed, and the next notice is a mode executed instead of the development effect. May be.

  In order to set the execution of each of the above effects, the characteristic unit 12AK executes, for example, the processing shown in FIG. 8-6 as the variable display start setting processing (step S171). In addition, various determinations performed in the following process are determined by, for example, a lottery (the same applies to determinations in other characteristic parts). The determination by lottery may be a random determination. For example, a table stored in the ROM 121 (a determination value to be compared with a random number value is determined based on various random numbers for production (random numbers of a plurality of types). Refer to the table assigned to the result).

  First, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the display result and the variation pattern (hereinafter, these are specified by the production control command (display result designation command, variation pattern designation command, etc.) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the special drawing game. The display result of the variable display (fixed decorative pattern) is determined according to the display result of this time and the variation pattern of this time (step 12AKS001). The fixed decorative pattern may be determined in advance according to the combination of the display result and the variation pattern.

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current variation pattern is one that specifies execution of super reach (PA3-2, PA3-3, PB3-2, PB3-3) (step 12AKS002).

  When the execution of the super reach is designated (step 12AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the next notice (step 12AKS003). The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the next notice at a different rate depending on the display result this time (for example, by changing the reference table according to the display result. The same applies to the “different rate” below). An example of the determination is shown in Figure 8-7. As shown in FIG. 8-7, when the display result of this time is a big hit (at the time of a big hit. The same applies hereinafter), the determination rate of the decision result of “execute next notice” is “do not give notice of next time”. It is higher than the decision rate of the decision result. On the other hand, when the display result of this time is lost (when lost, the same applies to the following), the magnitude relationship of each determination ratio is reversed. Therefore, when the next notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher (here, the jackpot expectation is considerably higher) than when the next notice is not executed. Also, whether or not to execute the next notice is determined according to the display result, not the change pattern (type of super reach) this time, so the next big notice expectation degree (big hit expectation degree suggested in the next notice) is , The type of super-reach (A or B), other effects, etc. (the jackpot expectation of the next notice is separate from the jackpot expectation of super-reach). In addition, when the next notice notifies the effect contents of the super reach which develops after that, the contents of the next notice may be different depending on the type of the super reach thereafter. When notifying whether the next notice will be randomly generated regardless of whether it will develop after that, when the next notice is decided to be executed, the notice content to be notified by the next notice will be decided separately. It is good to do so (the expectation for a big hit may be different depending on the contents of the effect to be notified). Further, a plurality of types of next notices may be prepared for one super reach, and the jackpot expectation may be changed according to the type.

  After that, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not to execute the effect effect (step 12AKS004). Whether or not to perform the accessory production is determined at a constant ratio regardless of the display result of this time, the change pattern (type of super reach) this time, the next notice, the active notice, the cut-in notice, and the like. Figure 8-8 shows an example of the decision. As shown in FIG. 8-8, it is determined that the character effect is executed at a higher rate than not executed, and when the super reach is executed, the character effect is executed in almost all cases. The character effect is executed independently regardless of the type of super reach, whether or not each effect such as the next notice, the active notice, and the cut-in notice is executed, and the execution mode. In addition, the accessory production may be executed without fail when it develops into super reach, and may not be executed when it does not develop into super reach.

  It should be noted that the next notice and the character effect are executed when the super reach is executed. Therefore, when any of the next notice and the character effect is executed, the development to the super reach is decided. These productions are also productions that suggest the development of super reach.

  After step 12AKS004, when the current variation pattern does not specify execution of super reach (step 12AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 secures the execution period of the active notice and the cut-in notice for this variation pattern. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern having a possible special figure fluctuation time (here, since the cut-in notice is executed during the normal reach, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 to PA3-4, PB3-2 to PB3-4 of the reach). (Step 12AKS005).

  In the case of a variation pattern in which the active notice and the cut-in notice can be executed (step 12AKS005; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the active notice is executed (step 12AKS006).

  In step 12AKS006, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the next notice (whether or not it is determined to execute the next notice in step 12AKS003), and the display result of this time (when "big hit" or "miss"). Depending on the “time”), the presence/absence of execution of the active notice is determined at different rates.

  FIG. 8-9(A) shows an example of determining whether or not to execute the active notice. As shown in FIG. 8-9(A), in both of the case of a big hit and the case of losing, the determination result of executing the active notice is more effective when the next notice is executed than when the next notice is not executed. The decision rate is high and the decision result of the decision not to execute the active notice is low. Therefore, when the active notice is executed, the execution expectation of the next notice is higher than when the active notice is not executed. Also, in both cases with and without execution of the next notice, at the time of a big hit, the determination rate of the decision result of "execute the active notice" is higher than that of the decision result of "not execute the active notice". When lost, the opposite is true. Therefore, when the active notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the active notice is not executed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the active notice in step 12AKS006, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display 5HA after being changed by the active notice. In the decision, first, the changed display color is determined at a different ratio according to the display result of this time (“at the time of big hit” or “at the time of loss”), and the next notice is made at a different ratio depending on whether or not the next notice is executed. The addition or non-addition of the icon 12AK001 is determined.

  FIG. 8-9(B) shows an example of determining the display color of the active display 5HA after execution of the active notice. As shown in FIG. 8-9(B), the determined ratio of the changed display color is high in the order of gold>red>blue during the big hit, and is opposite when lost. Therefore, the display color of the active display 5HA is in the order of gold>red>blue, and the jackpot expectation is high. It should be noted that white, which is a display color when the active notice is not executed, may be set to have a lower jackpot expectation degree than blue.

  FIG. 8-9C shows an example of determining whether or not to add the next notice icon 12AK001. As shown in FIG. 8-9(C), when the next notice is not executed, the next notice icon 12AK001 is not added. Therefore, when the next notice icon 12AK001 is displayed, execution of the next notice is confirmed, and execution of the next notice is suggested. When the next notice is executed, the next notice icon 12AK001 may or may not be added (it is easy to add). When the next notice icon 12AK001 is displayed, the next notice is more likely to be executed than when it is not displayed. In addition, even if the next notice icon 12AK001 is displayed, it is possible to prepare a pattern of gasse that the next notice is not executed. Easy to execute).

  As described above, the display mode of the active display 5HA can suggest the jackpot expectation degree and the next notice execution expectation degree (in particular, these are high). Note that the jackpot expectation and the next notice execution expectation actually affect the determination rate of the variation patterns that specify the super-reach A and B, the determination rate of the jackpot (probability), and so on. In order to realize the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation of execution of the next notice, and the magnitude relationship thereof, each of the determination rates may be appropriately adjusted (note that the determination rate of FIG. 8-9 can also be changed as appropriate).

  The method of determining whether or not to execute the active notice is arbitrary. For example, the presence/absence of execution of the active notice and the manner of executing the notice may be collectively determined by referring to a table having a determination result that simultaneously specifies the presence/absence of the execution and the aspect of the active notice. When the jackpot expectation and the next notice execution expectation of the display mode of the active display 5HA are the display color "gold" and the next notice icon is added> The display color is "red" and the next notice icon is added When the display color is “blue” and the next notice icon is added> When the display color is “gold” and the next notice icon is not added> When the display color is “red” and the next notice icon is added If it is not displayed> when the display color is "blue" and the next notice icon is not added> normal color (when the active notice is not executed). In this way, the combination of the next notice icon and the display color of the active display 5HA may make the big hit expectation degree and the next expectation execution expectation degree different, and when the next notice icon is added, the big hit The degree of expectation and the degree of expectation of execution of the next notice may be improved as compared with the case where the notice icon for the next time is not added.

  After step 12AKS006, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice is executed (step 12AKS007).

  In step 12AKS007, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the next notice is executed, whether or not the active notice is executed (whether or not the next notice is determined to be executed in step 12AKS006), and the current display result. Whether or not to execute the cut-in notice is determined at different rates.

  FIG. 8-10(A) shows an example of determining whether to execute the cut-in notice. As shown in FIG. 8-10(A), the next notice and the active notice are executed ＞ The next notice and the active notice are not executed ＞ The next notice and the active notice are not executed at both the big hit and the loss In order, the decision rate of "execute cut-in notice" is high, and next notice and active notice are executed <Next notice and active notice are not executed <Next notice and active notice are not executed In the order of, the determination rate of the determination result that "the cut-in notice is not executed" is low. Therefore, when the cut-in notice is executed, the execution expectation of the next notice is higher than when the cut-in notice is not executed. The cut-in notice is more likely to be executed when the active notice is executed than when it is not executed. In particular, when the advance notice is executed next time, the cut-in notice is more likely to be executed when the active notice is executed than when the active notice is not executed. Also, regardless of whether or not the next notice and the active notice are executed, in the case of a big hit, the determination rate of the decision result of “execute the cut-in notice” is the determination rate of the decision result of “not execute the cut-in notice”. It is higher than that, and when lost, the opposite is true. Therefore, when the cut-in notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the cut-in notice is not executed. The cut-in notice execution rate does not depend on whether or not the accessory production is executed. In particular, when the notice is executed next time, the execution ratio of the cut-in notice does not change depending on whether or not the character effect is executed.

  When it is determined in step 12AKS007 to execute the cut-in notice, the effect control CPU 120 determines the character to be displayed in the cut-in notice.

  FIG. 8-10(B) shows an example of determining the character to be displayed in the cut-in notice. As shown in FIG. 8-10(B), when the next notice is not executed, the next notice character 12AK003 is not displayed in the cut-in notice. When the next notice is executed, the next notice character 12AK003 may or may not be displayed (it is likely to be displayed). Therefore, when the next announcement character 12AK003 is displayed, the execution of the cut-in announcement is confirmed, and the execution of the cut-in announcement is suggested (when the next announcement character 12AK003 is displayed, it is more likely that Notice is easy to be executed). Further, when the next notice is executed, the determination rate of the character A (12AK002) is higher than the determination rate of the character B in both the big hit and the loss, and when the next notice is not performed, both the big hit and the loss are In, the determination rate of character A is lower than the determination rate of character B. Therefore, the expected degree of execution of the next notice is higher in the order of next notice character>character A>character B. In addition, the determination rate for the next big notice is higher than the determination rate for the big hit (when the next notice is executed), and for the character A, the decision rate for the lose when the next notice is executed. Is higher than the jackpot determination rate, and the determination rate for other lost games and the jackpot determination rate are the same, so the jackpot expectation is in the order of the next notice character> character B> character A. High (ranks of character A and character B are reversed compared to the expectation of next execution). In addition, the cut-in notice may include a pattern of gasse that the next notice character is not displayed even if the next notice character is displayed (however, when the next notice character is displayed, the next notice is displayed rather than when it is not displayed. Easy to execute).

  As described above, depending on the type of character displayed in the cut-in notice, it is possible to suggest a jackpot expectation degree and a next notice execution expectation degree (in particular, these are high). In addition, the jackpot expectation and the next notice execution expectation actually affect the determination rate of the variation patterns designating the super reach A and B, the determination rate of the jackpot (probability), and the like. In order to realize the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation of execution of the next notice, and the magnitude relationship thereof, each of the determination rates may be appropriately adjusted (note that the determination rate in FIG. 8-10 can also be changed as appropriate). The method of determining whether or not to execute the next notice is also arbitrary.

  After step 12AKS007, when it is not a variation pattern having a special figure variation time that can secure the execution period of the active notice and the cut-in notice (step 12AKS005; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the reach based on the variation pattern this time. Whether or not to execute various effects such as effects and other notice effects and the effect mode are determined (step 12AKS008), and the execution timing of the effect determined to be executed (the relationship between the variation pattern and the type of effect to be executed is determined in advance). The display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display (step 12AKS009), and the effect process flag is updated to "2" (step 12AKS010). When the display control unit 123 receives the instruction, the display control unit 123 starts variable display. Further, the display control unit 123 executes each effect determined above in the execution of the variable display during effect process that is repeatedly executed for each timer interrupt, at a timing predetermined in relation to the variation pattern ( As a result, execution of each effect is realized).

(Effects, modifications, etc.)
In this characteristic part 12AK, active notice (especially, the notice icon 12AK001 is added next time) or cut-in notice (especially, the character 12AK003 of the notice next time is displayed) is executed as an effect that can suggest execution of the notice next time. As it is played, the interest in the game is improving. Further, when executing the next notice, the cut-in notice is more likely to be executed (the execution ratio is higher) when the active notice is executed than when the active notice is not executed. Also, the effect production is executed without depending on the next notice, the active notice, the cut-in notice, and the like. In other words, the execution ratio of the cut-in notice and the active notice when the notice is executed next time does not directly depend on whether or not the character effect is executed. Therefore, the execution pattern of the production is diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the cut-in notice and the active notice, the next notice character and the next notice icon 12AK001 directly indicate the execution of the next notice, so the expectation of whether or not the next notice will be executed becomes clear. Since the information can be notified, the interest in the game is improving. In the cut-in notice and the active notice, the first mode that directly suggests the next notice (display mode with the next notice character 12AK003 or the next notice icon 12AK001) and the first notice that does not directly suggest the next notice Two modes (a mode in which the character A, the character B, and the next notice icon 12AK001 are not added) are prepared, and the first notice is more likely to be executed next time (the execution ratio is higher). According to the first aspect and the second aspect, the aspects of the cut-in notice and the active notice are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved. Furthermore, in the first mode, the next notice is more likely to be executed, and the player pays attention to the form of the cut-in notice or the active notice, so that the interest of the game is improved. Furthermore, according to the first aspect, the execution of the next notice can be clearly notified, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, as a character of the next notice of cut-in notice (a character that directly suggests execution of the next notice), the first character (such as the above-mentioned notice character 12AK003 of the next notice) displayed with "Next notice!" A second character displaying "Next notice?" may be prepared. In this case, the first character may decide to execute the next notice, and the second character may or may not execute the next notice (however, if the second character is not displayed). Also the next notice is likely to be executed). Also, regarding the next notice icon (an icon that directly indicates the execution of the next notice), the first icon of the next notice balloon (the next notice icon 12AK001 above) and the second notice? Two icons may be prepared. In this case, the first icon may be set to execute the next notice, and the second icon may not be executed next time (even if there is a problem) (However, as compared with the case where the second icon is not displayed). Also the next notice is likely to be executed). As described above, a plurality of modes may be provided as a mode that directly suggests the next notice, and the execution expectation of the next notice may be different for the plurality of modes (all differ, and some cases may be the same). .. As a result, the interest of the game is improved. Furthermore, by providing a mode in which the next notice may not be executed (second character or second icon), an opportunity to execute a cut-in notice or an active notice (particularly, notice of a form that directly suggests the next notice) It is possible to increase the number of execution opportunities), to make the player aware of the existence of the next notice, and to make the cut-in notice or the active notice have a suggestion form of the next notice. Is improved. It should be noted that the form (icon or character) that directly suggests the next notice may have a jackpot expectation degree higher than a specific jackpot expectation degree, such as appearing only when super reach or more.

  Regarding the cut-in notice, the expected degree of execution of the next notice is higher in the order of the next noticed character> character A> character B, but the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of next noticed character> character B> character A (next (The order of character A and character B is reversed compared to the execution expectation of the notice). For example, the order of higher and lower execution expectation of the next notice of each aspect of the cut-in notice and the cut-in notice By changing the order of the big hit expectation degree of each aspect differently, for example, even if the cut-in notice is executed in a manner in which the next notice execution expectation degree is low, if the big hit expectation degree of that aspect is high, Since the expectation can be maintained, the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  When the jackpot expectation and the next notice execution expectation of the display mode of the active display 5HA are the display color "gold" and the next notice icon is added> The display color is "red" and the next notice icon is added When the display color is “blue” and the next notice icon is added> When the display color is “gold” and the next notice icon is not added> When the display color is “red” and the next notice icon is added When not displayed> When the display color is "blue" and the next notice icon is not added> Normal color (when the active notice is not executed) By improving the execution expectation degree of when compared with the case where the notice icon is not added next time, the notice icon can be paid attention to next time, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. When the display color is “Gold” and the next notice icon is added> When the display color is “Gold” and the next notice icon is not added> When the display color is “Red” and the next notice icon is added When> The display color is "red" and the next notice icon is not added> When the display color is "blue" and the next notice icon is added> When the display color is "blue" and the next notice icon is added If not> Normal color (when the active notice is not executed), the next big notice icon is added, but the big hit expectation and the next notice execution expectation are displayed one level higher (the next notice icon is added. If the displayed color is “red”, it is lower than “gold” but may be higher than that without the next notice icon. Even in such a case, the interest of the game is improved.

  The concept of the active notice and the idea of the cut-in notice can be applied to each other. For example, instead of or in addition to the next notice icon added to the display form of the active display 5HA after the change due to the active notice, the display form of the next notice (for example, the letters "next notice" or the next notice such as "next notice") is displayed. A display mode in which associated characters or images are displayed, that is, a mode for directly suggesting the next notice) may be provided. Further, regarding the cut-in notice, the next notice icon or the like may be added to the character A or B. Regarding the relationship between the jackpot expectation and the next notice execution expectation, the display color of the jackpot expectation is “red” (for example, the next notice icon is added to the active notice as well as the cut-in notice. It may or may not be added. In the following, the same) is higher than “blue”, but the execution expectation of the next notice is that “blue” is higher than “red”. Good. In this way, for a certain effect, the ranking of the jackpot expectation degree that each aspect of the effect has and the ranking of the execution expectation degree of the next notice that each aspect of the effect has have a different rank, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. .

  Further, the character effect can be executed at a predetermined timing during execution of the normal reach when the super reach is executed, but the determination rate of whether or not to execute at the predetermined timing is whether the display result is a big hit or a loss. Since it does not depend on, the effect production is independent of the next notice, cut-in notice, active notice, etc., so that the execution pattern of the production is diversified and the entertainment of the game is interesting. Has improved.

  Note that, instead of the accessory effect, an explanation effect for displaying an explanation about the game may be executed. The explanation effect is, for example, an effect of displaying a description about the game on the image display device 5 as a telop. The explanation effect is executed at at least one of timings A to D (execution period of the explanation effect) shown in FIG. Timing A is a timing before the execution timing of the active notice. Timing B is a timing during execution of the normal reach after the execution timing of the active notice and before the execution timing of the cut-in notice. Timing C is a timing during the execution of the normal reach after the execution timing of the active notice and after the execution timing of the cut-in notice and before the execution timing of the next notice. Timing D is a timing during execution of super reach after the execution timing of the next notice. Timings A to D are all timings that arrive with one variable display. FIG. 8-11(B) shows an example of determining whether or not the explanation effect is executed and the execution timing (any of timings A to D) in the case of execution. Here, the determination ratios are equal, and the presence or absence and execution timing of the explanation effect are the same as the character effect, the display result of this time, the change pattern of this time (type of super reach), the next notice, It is decided at a fixed rate regardless of active notice, cut-in notice, etc. Whether or not to execute the explanation effect may be determined for each of the timings A to D. The content of the explanation effect (the explanation about the game) may be different according to the execution timing. By executing the explanatory effect at at least one of a plurality of timings, the execution pattern of the effect is diversified, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, like the accessory effect, the explanation effect does not depend on the next notice, the active notice, the cut-in notice, etc., so that even if the explanation effect is executed at at least one of a plurality of timings, one variable display is displayed. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the execution of the cut-in notice can be predicted depending on whether or not the explanation effect is executed, without interrupting the flow of the effect in (1). In this way, various effects including explanation effects can be suitably executed, and the interest of the game is improved.

(Structure of the characteristic part 12AK)
Hereinafter, the configuration of the gaming machine related to the characteristic unit 12AK taking the above description as an example will be described below. In addition, in order to realize the following configuration, the content of the above description (including a determination ratio for determining various effects) can be appropriately changed.

(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 12AK is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 12AK),
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a specific effect (for example, next notice),
Before the specific effect (for example, it may be before the execution start timing of the specific effect. That is, the execution period of the specific effect and the execution period of the first effect may partially overlap). First effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a first effect (for example, active notice),
Before the specific effect (for example, it may be before the execution start timing of the specific effect. That is, the execution period of the specific effect and the execution period of the second effect may partially overlap). , A second effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect,
A third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) third effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12, etc.),
The execution ratio of the second effect is
It is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-9). ,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (for example, see FIG. 8-9). .

  According to the above configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

  The effects that realize the specific effect, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are not limited to the above effects, but may be other effects (in addition, the execution order of each effect can be changed as appropriate. ). For example, the first effect is a look-ahead determination (a determination regarding a variable display that is being held (a look-ahead determination that determines whether the target variable display is in a specific mode such as reach or a big hit)). It may be a pending display notice that changes the display mode of the pending display based on the result (the active notice may be executed based on the result of the prefetch determination). Further, there may be provided a plurality of timings at which, for example, the first effect for changing the hold display or the active display can be executed. For the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect, an effect control command (fluctuation pattern specification command) that determines whether or not execution is performed on the main board 11 side, and specifies a fluctuation pattern according to the determination result, The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect may be executed on the effect control board 12 side. The second effect may be an active notice and the first effect may be a cut-in notice. Group notice of any one of the first effect to the third effect (for example, a mode that directly suggests the next notice is included), a notice by a pseudo stop temporary stop symbol (for example, stop of the symbol of the next notice) Other notice effects such as (including modes) may be used.

  The first effect is an active notification that adds the next notification icon 12AK001 (first effect of the first mode of the first mode to be described later), and the second effect is a cut-in notification using the character 12AK003 of the next notification (to be described later. It may be a second effect of one aspect). In this case, the determination as to whether or not to execute the active notice in FIG. 9 (particularly, the determination as to whether to execute the cut-in notice using the next notice character 12AK003) depends on whether or not to execute the active notice to which the next notice icon 12AK001 is added. Depending on the ratio, the determination method is arbitrary. When the next notice is executed, when the active notice with the next notice icon 12AK001 is executed, when the next notice is executed, and when the active notice with the next notice icon 12AK001 is not executed Instead, it is preferable that the cut-in notice using the character 12AK003 of the next notice be executed more easily.

(2) As a mode of the first effect, a first mode that directly suggests the specific effect (for example, a mode in which the next notice icon 12AK001 is added) and a second mode that does not directly suggest the specific effect (For example, a mode in which the next notice icon 12AK001 is not added),
The execution rate of the specific effect is higher when the aspect of the first effect is the first aspect than when it is the second aspect (for example, the active notice is executed and the next notice icon 12AK001 is displayed. When the active notice is executed and the next notice icon 12AK001 is not displayed, the next notice may be executed more easily).
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

(3) As a mode of the second effect, a first mode that directly suggests the specific effect (for example, display of a character for the next notice) and a second mode that does not directly suggest the specific effect (for example, , Display of character A or B, etc.),
When the mode of the second effect is the first mode, the execution rate of the specific effect is higher than when the mode of the second mode (for example, when the character of the next notice is displayed, the character A or (The next notice is easier to execute than when B is displayed.),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

  To directly suggest the specific effect in the first aspect of the first effect and the second effect means that the image of the name of the specific effect, the image of the name of the specific effect as an icon or a character (next notice icon 12AK001, This includes displaying the character 12AK003 of the next notice, displaying an image (reduced, made into an icon, including a character) used in the specific effect, and the like. Not directly suggesting the specific effect in the second aspect of the first effect and the second effect includes an aspect in which the images are not displayed.

(4) The third effect can be executed at a specific timing (for example, timing during normal reach when super reach is executed),
The execution ratio of the third effect at the specific timing is the same when the gaming machine is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player and when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 8-8). , See FIGS. 8-11),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

  The third effect is (1) a suggestive effect that suggests that the latent latency is currently changing, and (2) a suggestive effect that suggests a fall when the probability change state is terminated when it is determined to fall by a lottery, (3) Pachinko game machine of 1 type and 2 types mixed, specifically, when 2 types (for example, small hit), a game ball enters (specifically, an area inside the blade that opens in the small hit) (prize) Then, in the pachinko gaming machine that is in the big hit game state, the number of rounds in the big hit game state, which is started when the game ball enters the specific area when the feathers are opened for two types, is 16 rounds. (4) In the variable display in which the variable display result is one kind (a big hit in the 16-round big hit game state) in the pachinko game machine of the above-mentioned one type and two kinds mixture Or, in a variable display where the variable display result is 16R big hit in one type of pachinko gaming machine, a suggestion effect suggesting a 16-round big hit game state (for example, "If the current variable display result is a big hit" , 16R confirmation (16R jackpot game state confirmation), etc.), (5) Variable currently in execution (or on hold), such as suggestion effect that suggests that it will be in a shortened state after the jackpot game state It may be an effect that does not suggest a big hit expectation degree of a display or a big hit (a big hit lottery result at the start of variable display). In particular, the third effect is a ratio that does not depend on whether it is a big hit (and/or a small hit) or not (a ratio that does not depend on the proportion of the big hit or the small hit (if there is a small hit) win/win lottery) at an executable timing. Whether or not to execute is preferably determined. In addition, the third effect is an error display (especially, an error such as a full tank error that does not stop the progress of the game is preferable), a left-handed or right-handed notification, a display of the number of award balls during high base, and an award ball that has been acquired is predetermined. Even if it is a production of a notification that the progress of the game does not stop, such as a notification that the number has been exceeded (display of "1000 shots over"), other than the production (advantage production or suggestion production) related to the advantage level Good.

(5) The first effect may be before the second effect (for example, before the execution start timing of the second effect. That is, the execution period of the first effect and the execution period of the second effect. , May partially overlap.) (see, for example, FIG. 8-11),
The third effect can be executed at at least one of a plurality of timings (see, for example, FIG. 8-11),
The plurality of timings are at least before the execution timing of the second effect (for example, before the execution start timing of the second effect. That is, the execution period of the third effect and the execution of the second effect. The period may partially overlap with each other.) (see, for example, FIG. 8-11),
You may do it.

  According to the above configuration, the interest of the game is improved.

  The specific effect and the second effect may be executed after the reach is established (during normal reach and super reach), and the first effect may be executed before the reach is established and after the reach is established (during normal reach and super reach). In this case, the first effect executed before the reach is established may be executed in the first aspect, but the first effect executed after the reach is established may not be executed in the first aspect. (For example, the change in the display color of the active display 5HA is executed after the reach is established due to the active notice, but the next notice icon 12AK001 is added only before the reach is established). As a result, it is possible to suggest the execution of the specific effect such as the next notice from an early stage, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. In addition, the first effect can be executed after the specific effect and the second effect, which improves the enjoyment of the game.

  A plurality of timings that can be executed in the explanation effect include a timing before the reach is established and a timing after the reach is established. The explanation effect that is executed at the timing before the reach is established is the third presentation, and the timing after the reach is established. Whether or not to execute may be determined so that the explanation effect to be executed has a big hit expectation degree (in this case, the explanation effect executed at the timing after the reach is established is different from the third effect). With such a structure, the execution pattern of the effect is diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

(Other)
It should be noted that each of the above-mentioned configurations can be applied to a slot machine (for example, a slot machine equipped with one or more of a big bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.)). In this case, the effect corresponding to the above-mentioned super reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a continuous effect executed over a plurality of variable displays, and the specific effect is executed before the execution of the continuous effect is started, and the continuous effect is executed. Anything that suggests The first to third effects may be realized by appropriate effects.

  The configurations of the following characteristic portions can be appropriately applied to the above configurations. The specific effects and the first to third effects may be applied to various effects in the following characteristic parts. For example, setting change notification and/or setting confirmation notification, which will be described later, may be the third effect. Further, at least one of the specific effects and the first to third effects may be an effect that suggests the following set values (the winning ratio of the big hit varies depending on the value). Specifically, the specific effect is a suggestive effect that suggests the following set values, the first effect and the second effect are effects that can suggest the execution of the suggestive effect, and the third effect is a setting change notification and/or Alternatively, it may be a setting confirmation notification.

(Explanation of the configuration related to other features)
Next, other characteristic parts in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This characteristic part can execute control of an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and can change the set value based on a predetermined setting change operation. It is provided with a configuration for making it possible to confirm the set value being displayed. Then, the set value that is set can be displayed by the configuration capable of displaying the information regarding the game value such as the prize ball that is given based on the game medium such as the game ball entering the predetermined area.

  FIG. 9-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this feature. The same components as those in the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals. For example, the output circuit 111 may have the same configuration as the solenoid circuit 111. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may have the same configuration as the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The effect display device 5 may have the same configuration as the image display device 5. When the display result is “out” (Hiragana), it is the same as when the display result is “Loss” (Katakana). The first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D are game balls that have passed (entered) any of the plurality of general winning openings 10. Is detected, and a predetermined number (eg, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

  To the effect control board 12, operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving a movable member that is a movable accessory (movable effect device) and origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member are connected. .. The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be motors or electromagnetic solenoids. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured by using a contact sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance sensor. The production control board 12 is provided with a real-time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

  In this embodiment, when the game is controlled in the small hitting state, the second special winning opening which is provided separately from the first special winning opening which is the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided. The open state is achieved in a predetermined open mode. For example, in the small hitting game state, the second big winning opening is opened until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. State. In this embodiment, the second special winning opening is set to open once until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed in the small hitting game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the small hitting game state may be opened a plurality of times. The second special winning opening is opened by the second special winning opening door when the solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door is on, and the game ball passes through (enters) the second special winning opening. It will be easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door is in the off state, the second special winning opening is closed by the second special winning opening door, and the game ball passes through the second special winning opening ( Entry) In this way, the second special winning opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition to the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the second special winning opening is provided. You may.

  The count switch 23 serves as a first count switch that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first special winning opening. The game ball passing through (entering) the second special winning opening is detected by the second count switch by passing through the second count switch installed in the second special winning opening. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the second big winning opening which has been opened, the game ball passes (enters) another normal winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. ) More prize balls are paid out than when. Therefore, when the second special winning opening is opened, the game ball can enter the second special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the second special winning opening is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball into the second special winning opening to obtain the prize ball, which is disadvantageous to the player. There are two states.

  Inside the second special winning opening, a third count switch and a fourth count switch through which game balls can pass are installed. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second special winning opening passes through either the third count switch or the fourth count switch and is guided to the back side of the game board 2. The game ball is detected by the third count switch by passing through the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the fourth count switch by passing through the fourth count switch.

  In this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch during the small hit game, the game state after the small hit game is finished is controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, during the period when the second big winning opening door is open during the small hit game, the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration and the game ball is detected by the third count switch, Since it is possible to cheat by controlling the jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is designed to stop the game in such a case.

  Inside the second special winning opening, a regulating member for regulating and allowing the flow down of the game ball toward the third count switch is provided. The restricting member is provided so as to be changeable between a restricting state that restricts the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch and an allow state that allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch. Has been.

  In the small hitting game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening passes through the third count switch, it becomes a "big hit" based on the passing of the third count switch of the game ball (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the big hit game state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the third count switch. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hitting game state has passed the fourth count switch, the "big hit" does not occur. That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the fourth count switch.

  Then, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch of the game ball, the second special winning opening door is a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number ( The second special winning opening is opened in the period until the generation of 10 winning balls. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special winning opening is in the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player. In the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch, the second special winning opening is controlled to the first state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited, and the first special winning opening may be controlled to the first state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15" or "5"). Even before the number of times of execution of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the round game may be ended by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a game ball is not won in the second special winning opening). Good.

  FIG. 9-2 is a rear view showing the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the power supply board 17, etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 also has a function of displaying various winning information regarding winning. A display changeover switch 30 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29, and the information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be changed over by operating the display changeover switch 30.

  On the main board 11, a door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of a glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, a big winning opening for detecting the opening of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening. Various sensors such as the door sensor 91 are connected, and a function of determining occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) is also provided based on detection signals output from these sensors. The reset signal, the power-off signal, and the clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The main substrate 11 is enclosed in a substrate case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, a display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of the main substrate 11, and a display monitor 29 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 29. A display changeover switch 30 is arranged. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the game board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided with respective winning openings (first big winning opening, second big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter, "entry area". (Also referred to as “”), the number of game balls entering the game is totaled, and various winning information such as continuous ratio and winning ratio is displayed on the display monitor 29, and these winning information are displayed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the game hall. On the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the gaming board surface is designed so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when performing the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, whether or not the adjustment has been made, what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, the game balls enter the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Is confirmed (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of the adjustment and the contents after the installation.

  The power supply board 17 is configured to be able to supply electric power from an AC power supply (AC100V), which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electric components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. ing. The power supply board 17 is enclosed in a board case 202 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a lock switch 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is provided on the upper right side of the rear surface of the power supply board 17. A setting changeover switch 52 is provided which functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit in the changed state. Further, the power supply board 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power supply switch AK002.

  The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the staff in possession can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires a key operation, only the staff having a key for operating the lock switch 51 can be operated among the staff in the game arcade. The lock switch 51 is a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, and also a switch capable of executing an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation.

  When a power-on operation using the power switch AK002 is performed, a predetermined operation using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001 such as an on/off switching operation of the lock switch 51 and a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is performed. There is a case to be seen. The lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 may perform a predetermined operation using these switches simultaneously with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. Therefore, at least the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 may be arranged at positions that can be simultaneously operated by an attendant of the game hall or the like. In this way, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations such as an on/off switching operation and a pressing operation by an attendant of the game arcade in accordance with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. Is configured.

  In the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a nozzle (discharging port) for discharging the gaming ball that entered the winning opening or the gaming ball that entered the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The outlet switch 70 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a game ball that has been launched) is provided. The signal from the outlet switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11.

  FIG. 9C is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that this command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  The command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the effect display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or effect symbol. When the variable display result notification command determines whether the variable display result is “out”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result), or when the variable display result is “big hit” Different EXT data is set according to the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) which one of the plurality of types of the jackpot type is selected.

  The variable display result notification command includes, for example, commands 8C00H to 8C05H. The command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “out”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the advance determination result that the variable display result is “small hit A”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "small hit B".

  Command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating variable stop (determination) of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5. The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command for notifying that the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been cleared due to initialization in the game control microcomputer 100 when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by turning on the power. Is. The command 9100H is a setting change start command that specifies the start of a setting change state in which the set value can be changed when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by turning on the power. The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that specifies execution of power failure recovery processing corresponding to power failure recovery. Command 93XXH is a setting change end command that specifies the end of the setting change state.

  In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to the set value newly set by the change in the setting change state or the set value continuously set without being changed. When the set value consists of three levels, 1 to 3, the command 9300H specifies that the set value is set to "1", and the command 9301H specifies that the set value is set to "2". However, the command 9302H may specify that the set value is set to “3”. Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H in which the EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be specified by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, as a production control command different from the setting change end command, a setting value designation command for designating a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prepared. The setting value designation command corresponds to the variation start at each time of the special figure game in addition to the case where the setting change end command is transmitted, for example, when the first variation start command or the second variation start command is transmitted. May be transmitted. In addition, for example, every time the fluctuation display is started ten times in the special figure game, the set value designation command may be transmitted as the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times. Instead of these or in addition to these, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. A setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the customer waiting demo designation command.

  The command 9400H is a setting confirmation start command that specifies the start of a setting confirmation state that enables confirmation of the set value when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by powering on. Command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command that specifies the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set, for example, according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification process. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demonstration designating command for designating the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen (demonstration screen display) by displaying the effect image corresponding to the stop of the game in the customer waiting state.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open designation command that specifies that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a command for designating after the special winning opening is opened, which specifies that the big winning opening is in the period from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the EXT data to be set may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times the round is executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. , Is a first start mouth prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. Command B200H is that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. Based on the second special symbol display device 4B, the second start opening winning award designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command D100H is a V winning notification designating command which notifies that the third counting switch is turned on by the game ball passing through the third counting switch, that is, the V winning is won. In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control to execute the V winning notification effect that notifies that the V prize has been won, based on the reception of the V winning notification designation command. In the V-prize notification production, different production patterns may be determined according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the determination rates of a plurality of production patterns may be different. In this way, the set value may be suggested by the presentation mode of the V winning notification presentation. For example, when the effect image indicating “V” is rotated and displayed, the effect mode of the V winning notification effect includes an effect mode in which the rotation direction is clockwise and an effect mode in which the rotation direction is counterclockwise. May be. Alternatively, a plurality of effect modes in which the display color of the effect image indicating “V” is different may be included. Then, along with the transmission of the V winning notification designation command, the setting value designation command may be transmitted. As a result, when the V winning notification effect is executed, it is possible to appropriately determine the effect mode according to the set value.

  FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value that is a game random number counted on the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining. Numerical value data indicating each of the random number values MR4 and MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 is controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game controlling microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game controlling microcomputer 100.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 5, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each of the random number values MR1 to MR5. May be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 9-5 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. Below, the variation pattern of non-reach loss is also referred to as a non-reach variation pattern, and the variation pattern of reach loss is also referred to as a reach variation pattern. Further, a variation pattern in which the display result is "big hit" is also referred to as a big hit variation pattern, and a variation pattern in which the display result is "small hit" is also referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β,... A variation pattern may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ,... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  In the ROM 101, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1), a display result determination table (set value 2), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), a big hit type determination A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, and the like are stored.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the highest payout rate, the higher the value in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram of a display result determination table. In the display result determination table, a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the fluctuation special map designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target for variable display, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

  FIG. 9-6(A) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, if the first special symbol is the target of variable display, the set value is " It is possible to win big hits with a higher probability (1/99) than in the case of “2” and “3” and set some of these judgment values as judgment values corresponding to small hits. The small hits are won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the values are "2" and "3". When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first. The judgment value is set, and even when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display Along with winning, the half of these determination values are set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, so that the first special symbol has a higher probability (100/200). ) Is to win the small hit.

  FIG. 9-6(B) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2. When the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used, when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the jackpot is hit with a lower probability (1/150) than when the set value is "1". As well as winning, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so there is a lower probability (1/99) than when the setting value is "1" It is supposed to win. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is the same as when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first. The judgment value is set, and even when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display Along with winning, the half of these determination values are set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and , The small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is "1".

  FIG. 9-6(C) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the small hit is If not set, therefore, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, there is a lower probability (1/200) than when the set values are "1" and "2", and it is a big hit. You win, but you won't win a small win (probability of winning: 0). When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is the same as when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first. The judgment value is set, and even when the second special symbol is targeted for variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display Along with winning, the half of these determination values are set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and , With the same probability (100/200) as when the set values are “1” and “2”, the small win is won.

  The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit A ~ It decides to be a jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the big win and the small win are determined with a probability according to the set value. The "probability" indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Determining whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, but the big hit symbol the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, that is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol. In this way, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state differs depending on the set value, so if the set value is changed, one setting is made among a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player. Will be changed to other settings.

  In the present embodiment, in each of the display result determination tables, the winning probability of the small hits is the same when the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, but the small hits are set in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. The winning probability may be lowered. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is set to decrease in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but the same as when the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the second. The winning probability may be the same for all set values.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 uses a display result determination table to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit. However, a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are separately provided to The determination is made by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special diagram designation buffer, and the determination of the small hit is made. You may make it use a separate table for the case where the variation special figure designation|designated buffer is the 1st, and when it is the 2nd.

  In the present embodiment, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used, the determination values other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit are determined as the determination values corresponding to the small hit. It is not set, that is, the small hit was not won, but set a part of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit so that the small hit is won You can That is, the fact that the proportion of the small hit probability varies depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with three set values of 1 to 3 as settable values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 2 may be 2 or 4 or more (for example, 6). Further, the advantage of the player according to the set value is not limited to the one where the smaller the set value, the higher the advantage for the player, and the larger the set value, the higher the advantage for the player. Good. For example, when the set value consists of 6 stages, 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, the higher the payout rate is, and 6 is It may be the one with the highest payout rate. Thus, as the set value is set to 1, the player is least advantageous, and when 6 is set, the player is most advantageous to the player. The advantage may be gradually increased.

  FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Referenced to determine. The small hit type determination table is a small hit type A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the small type when the variable display result is determined to be the small hit pattern. Referenced to determine. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes the third count switch during the small hit A small hit game, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit type D big hit game is executed. Has become. Also, when the game ball passes the third count switch during the small hit B small hit game, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit type E big hit game is executed. . These big hits D and big hits E are not the big hit type determined by the random number value MR2 for judging the hit type extracted at the time of winning the start prize, and the game ball is the first in the small hit game of the small hit A and the small hit B. It is a jackpot type that is determined by whether or not a 3-count switch has been passed.

  FIG. 9-7(A) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). Big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), using the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), the big hit type Referenced when making a decision.

  FIG. 9-7(B) shows a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). Big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), using the pending storage based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed), the big hit type Referenced when making a decision.

  FIG. 9-7(C) shows a small hit type determination table. The small hit type determination table is referred to when the small hit type is determined regardless of whether the game ball is the reserved storage based on which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won. ..

  FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory diagram showing types of big hits in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, as the big hit type, there are big hit A and big hit D for which the time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state, and big hit B, big hit C and big hit E for which the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state. It is set. Of these jackpots A to jackpots E, jackpot C and jackpot E are the jackpots most advantageous to the player, and jackpots A and D are the jackpots most disadvantageous to the player. Since the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, the small hit B is a smaller hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

  Among these big hits A to big hits E, the big hit A is a big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of big hit A ends, time saving control is not executed. The big hit B is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state that is advantageous to the player. Also, after the jackpot B big hit game state is finished, the time saving control is executed until the special figure game is executed 20 times or until the big hit occurs again before the special figure game is executed 20 times. The big hit C is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) in which the first big winning opening is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot C large hit game state ends, the time saving control is executed until 100 special figure games are executed, or until a big hit occurs again before 100 special figure games are executed. The big hit D is a big hit that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) to change the second big winning opening to the second state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of big hit D ends, time saving control is not executed. The big hit E is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) to change the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. After the jackpot E is in the jackpot game state, the time saving control is executed until 100 special figure games are executed or until a big hit occurs again before 100 special figure games are executed.

  Although the big hit D and the big hit E are the big winning openings to be opened as the second big winning opening, the present invention is not limited to this, and the big winning openings to be opened are the big hit D and the big hit E. , The first big winning opening may be used. In other words, for the small hit game, the second big winning opening is opened, and for the big hit D and the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small hit game, instead of the second big winning opening as the big hit game, the first big winning opening. Just open the big prize hole.

  In the time saving state, the probability of being a "universal figure hit" increases, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a big hit may occur due to the V winning of the game ball during the small hit game. Therefore, the big hit game state is normal. It is easy to occur continuously without going through the state, and it becomes a so-called continuous state.

  In the time saving state after the big hit game of big hit B, the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 20, so a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games, and the game ball becomes the first ball. The rate of passing through the 3 count switch (the rate of the game ball V winning during 20 special drawing games to generate a big hit) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 100 times, so a small hit occurs during 100 special figure games. The rate at which the game ball passes through the third count switch (the rate at which the game ball wins V during a special game of 100 times and a big hit occurs) is set to almost 100%.

  In this embodiment, five types of big hits A to E are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more kinds of big hits may be provided. The following types may be provided.

  In the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 to 49 are assigned to the jackpot A in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 50 Up to 149 are assigned to the big hit B, and up to 150 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Further, when the setting value is "3", 0 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 150 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, the proportion for determining big hit B or big hit C for which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is lowered in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to.

  In the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 to 29 out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A, 30 Up to 99 are assigned to the big hit B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is "2", 0 to 69 of the judgment value range of MR2 of 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 70 to 269 are assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2. 270 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining big hits B and C in which time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is a big hit in the special figure game of the first special symbol. Is higher than that in the case of occurrence of, and becomes lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value set is 1, the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot type C at the highest rate, the jackpot B is then determined at a high rate, and the jackpot A is determined at a high rate. The lowest (the jackpot type determination ratio in the setting value 1: jackpot C> jackpot B> jackpot A). In addition, when the set value that is set is 2, the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot B with the highest determination rate, followed by the jackpot A with the highest determination rate, and the jackpot C with the lowest determination rate (set value Jackpot type determination ratio in 2: Big hit B> Big hit A> Big hit C). Furthermore, when the set value that is set is 3, the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot type A at the highest rate, the jackpot B is determined to be the highest rate, and the jackpot C is determined at the lowest rate. (The jackpot type determination ratio in the setting value 3: jackpot A> jackpot B> jackpot C).

  Depending on the set value that has been set, there may be one or more jackpot types that have not been determined among jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

  In the small hit type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, 0 to 99 of the determination value range of MR2 of 0 to 299 are assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299 are small. It is assigned to hit B. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit A and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. There is. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hit A and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. There is. In this way, when the V winning big hit occurs during the small hit game, the ratio of determining the big hit E, which is 100 times the special figure game in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is 100, is 20 times. It is set to be higher than the proportion for determining the big hit D, and to become lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value that is set is 1, the small hit B is determined as a small hit type at a higher ratio than the small hit A, so that a V winning occurs during the small hit game. Based on this, the percentage of the jackpot type determined as the jackpot E is higher than the percentage of the jackpot D determined (the jackpot type determination percentage due to the V winning at the set value 1: jackpot E> jackpot D). When the set value is 2, the small hit A and the small hit B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit type, so that the V prize is generated during the small hit game. The jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot type D and the jackpot E is determined to be the same (the jackpot type determination rate based on the V prize at the set value 2 is jackpot E=jackpot D). Furthermore, when the set value that is set is 3, it is based on the fact that the small hit A is determined as a higher proportion than the small hit B as the small hit type, so that a V prize is generated during the small hit game. The jackpot type is determined to be a jackpot type D at a higher rate than the jackpot type E is determined (a jackpot type determination rate due to a V prize at the set value 1: jackpot D> jackpot E).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is the jackpot and the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the V winning occurs are different according to the set value. That is, since the type of small hit game state controlled according to the set value that is set may change, and the type of big hit game state controlled when a V winning occurs may change, It has become possible to improve the fun of playing games.

  Depending on the set value that has been set, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B. That is, if the determination rate of the small hit type differs depending on the set value, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), that is, the other small hit type. It also includes determining the type at a rate of 100%. Further, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the variation special map is the first special map or the second special map. When the small hit type is determined at different rates according to the variation special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hits A and the small hits B depending on the variation special map. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at different rates according to the variation special map, do not determine either one of the small hit types (the determination rate is 0%), that is, the other small hit type. It also includes making a decision at a rate of 100%. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The determination ratio of the big hit type and the small hit type is not limited to different depending on the set value set, and the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by the same determination ratio for all the set values.

  The game nature itself is not limited to the one that does not change regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the game playability may change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the jackpot game ends based on the fact that the game ball passes through the third count switch during the jackpot game. While controlling the subsequent gaming state to the probability variation state, the gaming property (so-called V probability variation type) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the third count switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special map, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the set value set to is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game ball passes through the third count switch during high base (during time saving control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) that is controlled to a big hit game state based on that. Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as the game playability, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4). In the case of changing the game property according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes the third count switch), When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the third count switch). May be used.

  The ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. The variation pattern determination table is used to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns in accordance with the pre-determined result. As the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits, which is used when the variation display result is set to "big hit", and the variation display result is set to "small hit" are predetermined. A variation pattern determination table for big hits used when an error occurs and a variation pattern determination table for deviations used when it is previously determined that the variation display result is “off” are prepared in advance.

  FIG. 9-9 is an explanatory diagram showing a large hit variation pattern determination table and a small hit variation pattern determination table. The jackpot variation pattern determination table is referred to for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern determination random value MR3 when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot pattern. The small hit variation pattern determination table is referred to for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit design.

  FIG. 9-9(A) shows a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A). The big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A) is referred to when the big hit type is big hit A. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 0 to 300 out of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1). ) Is assigned to the change pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and that of 801 to 997 is assigned to the change pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). ing. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 350 of the judgment value range of MR3 of 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 351 to 825 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 826 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 400 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 401 to 850 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and the shift patterns of 851 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits.

  FIG. 9-9(B) shows a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the setting value is "1", the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is 0 to 100 out of the MR0 determination value range 0 to 997 ( PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Assigned to. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 150 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and the range 151 to 450 is set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 451 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 0 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 551 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits.

  The change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A) and the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B, big hit C) include a fluctuation pattern for normal reach big hits (PB1-1) and a fluctuation pattern for super reach α big hits (PB1- 2) For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. When the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is higher than the rate of determining the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), Moreover, the set values 1, 2 and 3 are lowered in this order. Further, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special drawing game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. In this embodiment, the super-reach β is easily determined when the type of big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, and the super reach α is decided when the type of big hit is “big hit A”. Since the determination value is assigned so that the player can be easily played, when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player's expectation that the result will be “big hit B” or “big hit C” is increased. You can do it.

  FIG. 9-9(C) shows a variation pattern determination table for small hits. In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment values of MR3 are small hits regardless of whether the setting value is "1", "2", or "3". Are assigned to the variation pattern (PC1-1) of In the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Has been. Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for the small hit in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for the small hit, With the set values “1”, “2”, and “3”, the variation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different rates.

  FIG. 9-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for deviation. The variation pattern determination table for deviation is referred to for determining the variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination when it is determined that the variation display symbol is to be a variation pattern.

  FIG. 9-10(A) shows a variation pattern determination table A for loss. The deviation variation pattern determination table A is referred to when the number of pending storages is one or less in the low base state where the game state is not subjected to the time saving control. In the variation pattern determination table A for out-of-range, the non-reach out-of-range variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α out-of-range variation pattern (PA2-2), the super-reach α out-of-range variation pattern A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of out-of-reach β (PA2-3) within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  FIG. 9-10(B) shows a variation pattern determination table B for deviation. The deviation variation pattern determination table B is referred to when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the variation pattern determination table B for out-of-range, the shortened non-reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach α corresponding to the total number of pending storage of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the deviation and the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β deviation. There is.

  FIG. 9-10(C) shows a variation pattern determination table C for loss. The deviation variation determination table C is referred to when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the variation pattern determination table C for out-of-range, a shortened non-reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA1-3), a normal-reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach α corresponding to the total number of reserved memories of 5 to 8 A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the outlier and the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the outlying super reach β in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. There is.

  FIG. 9-10(D) shows a variation pattern determination table D for deviation. The deviation variation pattern determination table D is referred to when the gaming state is the high base state in which the time saving control is executed. In the deviation variation pattern determination table D, a shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), a normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2) corresponding to the time saving control. -2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) with a deviation of super reach β.

  When using the out-of-range variation pattern determination tables A to D, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and is lower in the order of set values 1, 2, and 3. Is becoming. Further, when the deviation variation determination tables A to D are used, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are variation patterns of super-reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are variation of super reach β. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is out of order, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the production effect from being deteriorated due to the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

  The "common decision rate" means that the decision rate is completely the same at different setting values (the present embodiment), and that the decision rate is the same at different setting values (for example, the set value). Between 1 and the set value 3, the determination rate of the variation pattern of super reach differs by about 1%). If the variable display result is out of alignment, it is not limited to the form in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set, and if the variable display result is out of alignment, Regardless of the set value that is set, the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, super reach may be the same, or only the determination rate of variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach It may be the same. If the variation display result is out of alignment, regardless of the set value, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach α deviation and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β deviation are set to the set value. However, it is not limited to the same form, and when the variation display result is a deviation, only one of the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the variation pattern of the super reach β deviation is only one. The determination ratio may be the same regardless of the set value. If the variation display result is out of alignment, regardless of the set value, both the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach α deviation and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β deviation are set to the set value. However, it is not limited to the same form, and even when the variation display result is a big hit, the set value at which the variation ratio of the super reach big hit is set regardless of the set value is set. May be the same regardless of. When the variation display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is not limited to the form that is different depending on the set value that is set. Among the reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern, one or more undetermined variation patterns may be present. The fact that the variation pattern determination rate differs depending on the set value means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It also includes making decisions in. It is not limited to the form in which the variation pattern is determined by using the variation pattern determination table for disparity that varies depending on the total number of pending storages, and the number of pending storages in the special symbol to be varied (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol). The number of reserved storage of the first special symbol when executing, the number of reserved storage of the second special symbol when performing the variable display of the second special symbol) May be determined.

  In each of the out-of-range variation pattern determination tables, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value of 1 to 3, the super reach out variation pattern (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is set. The range of assigned random numbers is the same. However, the jackpot probability and the out-of-range probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variation display is actually executed in the variation pattern of the out-of-reach (over-reach is out of proportion). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the variation display is not limited to a mode in which the proportion of execution in the variation pattern of super-reach is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability for each set value In consideration of the deviation probability, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation display may be executed at the same ratio in the fluctuation pattern of the super-reach deviation.

  9-11 shows the game control data holding area 150. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 and serves as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the reservation data regarding the variable display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning number to the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and sets the first starting condition based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. As the pending data, the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. , Until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning occurs. The pending data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure has not been started yet and is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game It becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not a big hit will occur based on the (special map display result).

  The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the reservation data regarding the variable display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning number (game ball detection order) to the second start winning port with the reservation number, and sets the second start condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball. As the pending data, the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. , Until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning occurs. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure has not been started yet and is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game It becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not a big hit will occur based on the (special map display result).

  In addition, with the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the passing (entering) of the gaming ball. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning due to this may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, start port data indicating which of the first start winning port and the second start winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The general figure reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation information of the general figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure hold storage unit 151C is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the public figure display result determination from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number MR4 for use as reserved data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count some or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

  The totalization of game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 11 of this embodiment will be described. On the main board 11, information relating to the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls due to winning at the first starting winning port (belly), the number of winning balls due to winning at the second starting winning port (Den Chu), and the first major The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning in the prize hole and the second prize hole (attacker) are input, and the number of shot balls is totaled, and the display monitor 29 displays the first prize hole and the total number of prize balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to winning at the second big prize hole (attacker), and the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the total number of prize balls The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to winning in the 1st prize hole and the 2nd prize hole (attacker), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. Is displayed. The consecutive ratio is the proportion of the total number of prize balls, which is the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive winnings of continuous winnings) due to winning in the first and second big winning openings (attackers). The winning ratio is the number of prize balls from the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) among the total number of prize balls, and the number of prize balls from the first prize hole and the second prize hole (attacker) ( It is the ratio of the number of balls obtained below). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls acquired below) is based on the number of prize balls from the first and second prize holes (attackers) and the prize from the second start prize hole (Den Chu). Number of prize balls and prize balls due to winning in prize holes (first start prize hole, general prize hole) other than the first prize hole, second prize hole (attacker) and second starting prize hole (Den Chu) It is the sum of the numbers and. The first big winning opening, the second big winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (den Chu) are variable winning objects, and the width of the game ball that can be passed varies, thereby winning the game ball. It is an accessory whose expected ratio changes. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first winning opening, the second winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are fixed winning objects, and are games. The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning percentage of the game ball is a fixed character.

  As for the method of totaling and calculating the information on the winning of the game, the continuous ratio and the winning ratio are the winning balls to the first starting winning hole (navel) and the general winning hole (sode) in the number of prize balls of 6000 pieces. Number (general prize balls), number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of Den Chu balls), which is the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu), first prize hole and second prize hole The number of special electric player prize balls (attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls due to winning in the mouth (attacker), is counted. The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60,000 pieces are calculated. It should be noted that the number of prize balls (general prize balls) due to winning the first start prize hole (navel) and the general prize hole (sode), the number of normal electric prize balls (the number of electric Chu prize balls), and the special electricity The number of winning prize balls (attacker prize ball number) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, and has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, 6000 11 sets of storage are stored in a considerable quantity (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and combination ratio (%) of these totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for the number of prize balls of 60,000 is totaled. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

  The display monitor 29 calculates a base ratio (%), a winning combination ratio (%), and a cumulative running ratio (%), a winning combination ratio (%), and a base (60,000 prize balls) calculated last time. It is possible to switch and display the base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the last 60000 award balls every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning and the number of prize balls due to winning at the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) are changed. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the consecutive ratio (%) of 6000 is reflected in the winning ratio (%) of 60,000 displayed thereafter, the number of winning balls is 6000. There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the continuous ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) of 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls due to winning at the first starting prize hole (navel), the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu), the first prize hole and the second prize hole (attacker) If the number of prize balls due to winning and the total number of prize balls are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in switching display (for example, display timing of continuous ratio (%) for 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy occurs. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the storage area for storing the information about the winning of the game in the present embodiment is provided for each set value, and the general winning award ball, the first starting mouth award ball, the normal electric prize ball, the special electric prize. The balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. Therefore, the continuous ratio, winning combination ratio, and base of this embodiment can be individually calculated for each set value.

  As an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls due to winning at the second starting prize hole (Den Chu) and the first prize hole and the second prize hole (attacker) A method of calculating a character ratio (role ratio (%)) in the case where the number of character acquisition balls, which is the total of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the prize, is 42000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of winning balls is the cumulative total number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker and the electric chu. In addition, the number of consecutive winnings balls means the total number of game media paid out by winning the game media in the attacker. The total number of hits refers to the total number of game media hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60,000. Therefore, the continuous ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). Further, the base can be calculated by the following equation (3).

  Consecutive ratio = [Number of balls obtained in succession / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 (1)

  Role ratio=[(Number of consecutive winning roles + Number of winning roles)/Total number of winnings]×100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total driving] x 100 (3)

  When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of balls acquired is 42000, the character ratio is calculated as 0.70 (three decimal places are rounded down) by dividing 42,000 by 60,000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculation below the decimal point, calculation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning accessory balls is multiplied by 100 to 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point. Here, when obtaining the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point, it is sufficient to divide by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the accessory ratio for a long period. In other words, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning accessory balls. The microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only operate values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  A third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of prize balls is 00EA60h, the lower 1 byte 60h is rounded down, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, for the character acquisition ball number 00A410h, the lower 1 byte 10h is rounded down to calculate the character acquisition ball number 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation. Then, in the same manner as the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%. In the third calculation method, the calculation in the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes easy, but an error of +12% occurs. However, the error is +1% when the total number of prize balls and the number of winning accessory balls are both 10. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and the error is approximated to the original value.

  In the calculation of the winning ratio (%), if the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning role balls is 19876 as an example, the ratio is calculated by dividing 34977 as a divisor for 19876. It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When the game control microcomputer 100 performs a calculation, it is necessary to avoid calculation with a decimal point, and therefore the calculation formula is replaced as follows. In the division of 1987/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down, resulting in 1987/343=57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated that the winning combination (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, there is an error in the display from the value calculated by accurate calculation. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799=100%, and when replaced with the calculation in the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327=100.3%, an error of +0.3%. When the calculation is performed by rounding off the decimal point, for example, when the exact value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69%→70% is displayed on the display 1 Although it is considered that the error of% is displayed, the role ratio (%) (or the continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error even in the display of the error of 1%.

  Further, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, and therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, calculation cannot be performed. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10000, the error exceeds 1%, which may result in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of balls acquired, the larger the error. Therefore, until the counter counts the total number of balls acquired (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more, the ratio (%) and continuous ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. The fact that the error may be large even if the display is performed may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The storage area in which the information about the winning of the game is stored may be continuously stored without being initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated. This storage area includes a ring buffer, and may constitute a 10-set total buffer, a total prize ball buffer, and the like, in which information related to game winnings stored in a ring buffer including 10 counters each having a maximum of 2 bytes is totaled. .. It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, the value of the number of acquired balls is larger than the stored value of the total number of prize balls, Initialization of the memory area in which information about game winnings is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of balls for continuous winnings is greater than the value of the number of balls acquired Processing may be performed. Further, the error display and the warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the initialization process may be performed together with or after the error display and the warning display.

  In addition, when it is necessary to redo the calculation of the ratio and the ratio, such as when the ratio or the ratio is calculated, a display monitor clear switch different from the clear switch AK001 is operated. By doing so, the data used for the continuous ratio and the ratio stored in the nonvolatile storage device such as the RAM 102 or the flash memory may be cleared. The display monitor clear switch may be arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 at a position, such as a predetermined position on the power supply board 17, which cannot be easily operated by an attendant of the game arcade. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11.

  The substrate case 201 is formed of a translucent material, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 is provided with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for radiating heat of the electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not obstructed by the heat radiation holes. The term "directly front" as used herein means the direct frontal direction from the viewpoint of the main board 11, and means between the main board 11 and an attendant or the like of the game arcade trying to visually recognize the main board 11.

  The display monitor 29 displays the winning ratio (%), the continuous ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and displays the respective values by switching them every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To do. In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is being displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs that a game medium is newly won in the electric chu or attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to the continuous ratio after 5 seconds ( If it is displayed as the value of (%), the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. Therefore, it is preferable to calculate the winning combination ratio (%) and the continuous ratio (%) in the same interrupt and sequentially display the calculated values. When the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is set to 2 digits (for example, when 7 segments are provided two times), it becomes impossible to display 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. The display monitor 29 can display numerical values in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper 2 digits under a specific condition. It should be noted that it is not limited to a form in which a game medium is detected by a sensor provided in each of the attacker and the electric Chu, and each prize ball number is individually counted based on the detection result. Using the sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the game media that won the prize and the game media that won the prize to the electric chu, is used, based on the detection result May be totaled.

  The main board 11 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2. On the back surface side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, each peripheral board such as the effect control board 12 is also provided. The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passage number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general prize number counter and a big prize number counter are provided. It should be noted that the number of winnings of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening (attacker) is not limited to the form in which the number of winnings is counted by the big winning number counter, and the number of winnings to these first big winning holes is counted. A first big prize number counter and a second big prize number counter for counting the number of prizes to the second big prize port are individually provided, and the number of prizes to the first big prize port and the second big prize port The number of prizes may be individually calculated and the number of prizes may be summed to obtain the number of prizes for the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start prize number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start opening switch 22A. The second start prize number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The first general winning prize counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning prize switch 26A. The second general prize winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general award number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the third general award opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The special winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

  FIGS. 9-12 show the layout and display contents of the display monitor 29. The main board 11 is housed in a board case 201. The board case 201 is provided with the caulking pins 11B. By providing the crimping pins 11B, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 201, and fraudulent acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The substrate case 201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as “crimped substrate case”). The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing sticker 11S for certifying that the main board 11 is enclosed is attached to the board case 201. The seal sticker 11S is attached, for example, across the detached portion of the substrate case 201. The sealing sticker 11S is arranged at a position distant from the main board 11, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 29 is obstructed, such as the front of the display monitor 29. In this way, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position not hidden by the sealing sticker 11S.

  As shown in FIG. 9-12(A), the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D and a fifth display unit 29E. .. Each of the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E is composed of 7 segments configured by 7 segments that draw a letter "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

  As shown in FIG. 9-12(B), each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 29. The aggregated set values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display section 29A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display section 29B of the second digit and the third display section 29C of the third digit. Then, numerical values are displayed in percentage on the fourth display portion 29D of the fourth digit and the fifth display portion 29E of the fifth digit. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60,000 award balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the last 60000 award balls is displayed. To be done. The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset. In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls from the second starting prize hole in the high base state and the number of prize balls from the prize hole in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio of percentage is displayed (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the total cumulative ratio of display No3 is displayed, "A6." is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of display No4 is displayed, “A7.” is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative total ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. When the display No. 5 base 1 is displayed, “bL.” is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the display No. 4 base 2 is displayed, the second display unit “B6.” is displayed on 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display).

  The main board 11 is used to calculate the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. The first special winning opening and the second special winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening. The total number of game balls that have entered the fourth general winning opening and the number of game balls that have been discharged from the discharge port are totaled. In the main processing, the CPU 103, in the main process, the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning opening switch 26A to the fourth general winning opening switch. A switch process is performed to confirm the state (presence or absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning opening switch 26D and the discharging port switch 70. In the switch processing, which entry area the game ball has entered is specified based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signals are output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The values of the first starting prize number counter and the second starting prize number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the big prize number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch 26A. When the detection signals are output from the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, the The values of the 3 general prize number counter and the 4th general prize number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the discharge port switch 70, the values of the driving number counter are added to each entry area. The number of game balls that have entered (the number of game balls that have won each winning opening) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102. In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. By including it in the switch process), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without running a separate counting program, that is, without causing the problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in execution programs. Has become.

  FIG. 9-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of prize balls to each winning opening. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening based on the total number of winning game balls in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let The number of prize balls by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out for one prize in the prize hole by the number of winnings in the prize hole. The number of prize balls for winning game balls is predetermined for each prize hole. The number of prize balls for each classified prize hole is the general prize hole prize balls (the prize balls from the first general prize hole to the fourth general prize hole (sode)), and the first starting prize hole prize balls (first 1 The number of prize balls for starting prize hole (award ball), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball for Den Chu), and special electric award ball (award ball for attacker) is there. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of game balls hit. The CPU 103 separately counts the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the number of winning game balls to the first starting winning opening. However, the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening and the first start The number of winning game balls to the winning openings may be collectively tabulated. Further, the number of prize balls of the general winning award balls and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning award balls are individually calculated. The number of prize balls may be collectively calculated.

  The RAM 102 has a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of prize balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer is provided with ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. In this way, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer has a 0th storage area including a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls, which is obtained by winning the prize. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases as the game progresses, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256×256=65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin. Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each prize hole, a total sum of the number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and a total accumulation area. There is. The storage area for the total sum and the total cumulative total for 10 sets is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, 256×256×256=16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 pieces of data can be reserved. I can remember.

  The RAM 102 stores a ratio ratio combination ratio storage area that stores the ratios and ratios of 10 sets and total cumulative total, 10 sets of bases (base 2) and the last 10 sets of bases (base 1). And a base storage area for storing data. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total cumulative total based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. And the cumulative ratio and the cumulative ratio are stored in the ratio ratio storage area. Each of the combination ratio ratio storage areas for storing the combination ratios and the total ratios for 10 sets and the total sum is composed of a maximum 1-byte counter. For example, when storing the combination ratio and the continuous ratio for 10 sets and the total sum, it is possible to store them with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter when storing them as integers. In the CPU 103 of the main board 11, the base for 10 sets is calculated by the number of hits of the game ball to each winning opening for 10 sets, and the calculated base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time. The base (base 1) calculated by the number of hits to the number of winning game balls to each winning opening for 10 sets is stored in the base storage area. If the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as, for example, integers, they can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  9-14 shows a memory map of the CPU 103 on the main board 11. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing a built-in register, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. The address/data signal lines of the ROM 101 are assigned to a built-in ROM area which is a ROM area (0000H to 2FBFH in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FBFH. 2FC0H to 2FFFH is a program management area) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 is Data is read from the ROM 101 by designating this ROM area. Further, in this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas from the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H. The address/data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the built-in register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and transfers the data to the register via the built-in register area. Write the data of. The address/data signal lines of the RAM 102 are assigned to a built-in RAM area, which is the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area and reads data from the RAM 102. Data is written in the RAM 102. Note that other areas (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) in the memory space are non-use areas.

  FIG. 9-15 shows an RWM area which is a built-in RAM area. The built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 includes a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area and other areas. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103, and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data for the control program (which may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored. Reference data (for example, various lottery data) referred to by the control program is temporarily stored in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area.

  The data used for displaying the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing a total sum of the number of prize balls for each winning opening and a storage area for a cumulative proportion ratio of the total sum. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening (for 10 sets ) Total storage area and 10 sets of rational combination ratio storage areas are provided. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different start addresses of the subroutines are stored. 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the built-in RAM area, and each data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) stores 1 byte. When the data has the number of bytes exceeding (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. .

  9-16 shows a display control example on the display monitor 29. The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base. A plurality of items are sequentially displayed on the display monitor 29.

  FIG. 9-16(A) is a time chart showing a mode of display change on the display monitor 29. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed. The display of the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. Then, when the display of display No. 6 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. After that, from the short-term serial ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6, each display is sequentially changed and displayed every 5 seconds. As for the display color, only the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 to the base 2 of display No. 5 are red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 9-16 (B1) shows a case where the short-term continuous ratio of display No1 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16(B2) shows a case where the short-term combination ratio of display No2 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. In addition, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character "3." is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B3) shows a case of displaying the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No3. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "A" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B4) shows a case of displaying the total cumulative combination ratio of display No4. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B5) shows a case where the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character "b" is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character "L." is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. In addition, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 9-16 (B6) shows a case where the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. In addition, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  The display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display changeover switch 30. There is. For example, when the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “1”, the display changeover switch 30 is operated. As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "2", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, and total cumulative consecutive ratio displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E are calculated. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "2". When the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning combination ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the set value is “2” are displayed, by operating the display changeover switch 30, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "3", and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative continuous ratio, and total cumulative displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the winning ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "3". When the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the setting value is “3” are displayed, by operating the display changeover switch 30, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to "1", and the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, and total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the winning ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is changed to the display corresponding to the case where the set value is "1".

  It should be noted that the display monitor 29 is not limited to the form in which the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base at each set value can be displayed, and only one numerical value out of these consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base, or Only two numerical values may be displayed. The present invention is not limited to the form in which the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 29. Instead of calculating the winning combination and the base, the history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 29. In the display monitor 29, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are not limited to being displayed in green, and the short-term ratio is The short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, and total cumulative combination ratio are displayed in the same color. For base 1 and base 2, the short-term combination ratio, short-term combination ratio, total accumulation combination ratio, and total accumulation combination ratio are the same. You may display in color.

  FIG. 9-17 shows an execution example of update in the active buffer and the ring buffer. In the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Further, the storages of the total ratio and total cumulative storage areas for 10 sets, and the storage of the ratio combination ratio storage area for storing the ratios and ratios of 10 sets and total totals are respectively updated. At this time, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the 1st storage area to the 9th storage area of the ring buffer are respectively transferred to the second storage area. Move from the storage area to the tenth storage area. For example, the number of general winning award balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas is “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, “87”, “66”, “117”, “45”, respectively. It is "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st to 10th storage areas is set to "27", "81", and "120", respectively. “36” “225” “87” “66” “117” “45” “21”. Along with this, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased. When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th to 10th storage regions, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

(Explanation of game control regarding other features)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in the present embodiment. This main process may be executed instead of the game control main process. In the main processing, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step Sa3). After initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step Sa4), the RAM 102 can be accessed. Is set to (step Sa5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the clear switch AK001 is on based on the clear signal which is the output signal of the clear switch AK001 (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether the power-off detection processing has been executed (step Sa7). When the power failure detection process is executed, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the start address of the backup setting table is set in the pointer (step Sa41), and the initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa42). As a result, the stored contents at the time of power failure regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are restored.

  When the power failure is restored in step Sa42, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal which is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). When the lock switch 51 is turned on in step AKS001, the setting confirmation process is executed (step AKS002), whereby the set value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation processing, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. After the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001 or after the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. In addition, when the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001, the command 9200H which is the power failure recovery designation command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 182.

  When the execution of the setting confirmation processing is started in step AKS002, the setting confirmation state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is entered, and the setting confirmation is started from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A command 9400H which is a command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stopped state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in a stopped state, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the ball hitting handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary In the symbol display device 20, it may be controlled so as to stop the display of the off symbol and the like, and to display a game stop state different from the off symbol. When the execution of the setting confirmation processing in step AKS001 ends, the setting confirmation state and the game stop state accompanying this are terminated, and the command 9401H which is the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. To be done.

  If the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the power-off detection processing is not executed in step Sa7, or the check result is not normal in step Sa8, the predetermined RAM clear is performed. The processing is executed to clear the data other than the set values stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 (step Sa9). The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may not be cleared in step Sa9. Subsequent to step Sa9, the start address of the initialization setting table is set to the pointer (step Sa10), and the initial value is set to the work area based on the contents (step Sa11). As a result, the stored contents regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are initialized. If the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by steps Sa9 and Sa10. , The operation related to the initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be detected.

  When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined based on the lock switch signal whether the lock switch 51 is on (step Sa12). When the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, a setting change process is executed (step Sa13), so that the set value can be changed. In the setting change processing, it is possible to confirm the change status of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display on the display monitor 29. After the lock switch 51 is off in step Sa12 or after the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

  When the lock switch 51 is off at step Sa12, the command 9000H which is the RAM clear notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Note that the setting change process is not limited to the mode in which the lock switch 51 is turned on, and the setting change process is executed on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable.

  When the execution of the setting change process is started in step Sa13, the setting change state is set as the change permission state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 transfers to the effect control board 12. Then, a command 9100H which is a setting change start command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the game stopped state as in the setting confirmation state. When the execution of the setting change process in step Sa13 ends, the setting change state and the game stop state accompanying it are ended, and the main board 11 sends a command 93XXH, which is a setting change end command, to the effect control board 12. To be done. In addition to the case where the clear switch AK001 is turned on, the setting is made if the lock switch 51 is turned on when the power-off inspection process is not executed or the execution result of the parity check is not normal. The configuration is not limited to the mode in which the change process is executed, and the setting change process may be executed if the lock switch 51 is on only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is on.

  After that, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read (step Sa14), and the value is used as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initialized by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). Further, the timer is set to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, interrupt prohibition setting (step Sa17), display random number updating process (step Sa18), initial value random number updating process (step Sa19), and interrupt permission setting (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

  When executing the special symbol normal process in the special symbol process process, the CPU 103, based on the display result determination table according to the set value that is set, and the numerical value data indicating the random value MR1 for the variable display result determination, Whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed, a fluctuation pattern judgment table corresponding to the set value and numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment are used to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns. You just have to decide. In this way, by determining the variable display result with a different ratio according to the set value that has been set, it is possible to proceed with the game such that the degree of advantage for the player is different.

  In this embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6 of the main processing, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. Although the setting value can be changed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the storage content of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the setting value changeable state ends. . That is, if the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6, it is determined in step Sa12 whether or not the lock switch 51 is turned on. If it is off, the process proceeds to steps Sa9 to Sa11 to save the RAM 102. The stored contents are initialized (cleared). On the other hand, if the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, and after the process ends, steps Sa9- You may make it advance to Sa11. For example, when the RAM clear notification command is transmitted in response to the storage contents of the RAM 102 being initialized (cleared), the production control board 12 starts the initialization notification upon receipt of the RAM clear notification command. Sometimes. Therefore, if Steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed before Step Sa13, the initialization notification is executed and the setting is executed when the setting change process is executed in Step Sa13 and the set value can be changed. There is a risk that the work of changing the value will be hindered. On the other hand, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) by the steps Sa9 to Sa11 after the setting change process of the step Sa13 is completed, so that the initialization notification or the like is started after the change of the set value is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

  FIG. 9-19 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process of step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 9-19(A), the power switch AK002 is operated by an attendant or the like of the game arcade while the display ratio, the ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power supply is cut off. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. After that, when an attendant of the game arcade or the like presses the clear switch AK001 and operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on, the power supply is started by turning on the power. As shown in -19(C), on the display monitor 29, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A. When the setting change switch 52 is pressed by an attendant or the like in the game arcade while the set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is sequentially updated every time the operation is detected. And display it. For example, when the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, if "1" is displayed on the first display unit 29A, it is updated to "2", and if "2" is displayed, it is changed to "3". It is sufficient that the display of the first display unit 29A can be cyclically updated between "1" to "3" by updating and updating to "1" if "3" is displayed. After that, when the lock switch 51 is pressed by an attendant of the game arcade or the like, the setting value displayed on the first display unit 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update memory) due to the detection of the operation. To do. At this time, the first display unit 29A is displayed in a blinking manner so that a staff member or the like of the game hall can notice that the new set value is stored.

  When the setting change process is executed in step Sa13, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9. Therefore, when the set value is changed, the pending storage based on the pending data in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A and the second special figure pending storage unit 151B is erased. When a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by an attendant or the like in the game arcade, the setting change process is terminated because the operation is detected. The CPU 103 enters a state in which the game can be played by executing the processing of step Sa14 and subsequent steps in the main processing. As a result, for example, variable display results, jackpot types, fluctuation pattern determination lottery, prize ball payout, and the like can be executed. In the setting change process, the initial display displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the mode in which the stored value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed. For example, the setting value most advantageous to the player It is also possible to display a preset setting value such as "1" or "3" which is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player.

  In the setting change process, the control of sequentially updating and displaying the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to the mode of updating each time the pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Instead of this, for example, it may be sequentially updated and displayed each time the pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is detected. For example, in the display monitor 29, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed while the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the first display unit 29A displays “1”. Is displayed, "2" is updated to "2", "3" is displayed, and "3" is displayed to "1". It suffices that the display on the display unit 29A can be cyclically updated between "1" and "3". In this case, the clear switch AK001 used for initializing the stored contents of the RAM 102 can be commonly used for changing the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 9-20 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation processing of step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 9-20(A), the power switch AK002 is operated by an attendant of the game arcade, etc. when the gear ratio, the winning ratio, the base, etc. are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power supply is cut off. When stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends, as shown in FIG. After that, when a person in charge of the game arcade or the like operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on without pressing the clear switch AK001, when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the figure As shown in 9-20(C), on the display monitor 29, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A. In the state where this set value is displayed, even if the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by an attendant at the game hall or the like, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A cannot be updated and displayed. After that, when a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by an attendant or the like in the game arcade, the setting confirmation process is ended because the operation is detected. The CPU 103 enters a state in which the game can be played by executing the processing of step Sa14 and subsequent steps in the main processing. As a result, for example, variable display results, jackpot types, fluctuation pattern determination lottery, prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

  In this way, the display monitor 29 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display information about the gaming value that enables confirmation of the number of prize balls after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. On the display monitor 29, it is possible to display information on set values for advancing the game so as to have different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, by changing the probability that the big hit game state is controlled in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the set value separately from the display device for displaying the information about the game value, it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 and display the ratio, the ratio, the base, etc. However, the display monitor 29 is used to display the ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc., while the setting value is displayed using a setting display unit different from the display monitor 29. Good. This makes it possible to clearly separate the control for displaying the ratio, the combination ratio, the base, etc. using the display monitor 29 and the control for displaying the set value using the setting display unit. It is possible to disperse and simplify the processing by the control program and reduce the control load. As described above, when the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used, the setting display unit may be arranged on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display monitor 29 is arranged, or the display monitor 29 is arranged. The setting display unit may be arranged on the same substrate as the substrate.

(Explanation of a modified example relating to the configuration and game control in other characteristic parts)
FIG. 9-21 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in a modification in which the setting change process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the set value may be changed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the game machine frame 3 is opened by an attendant of the game hall or the like, and the clear switch AK001 is turned on along with the switching operation for turning on the lock switch 51. When the pressing operation for turning on is performed, these operations are detected, so that the display monitor 29 causes the first display unit 29A to display the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the setting change switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by an attendant or the like in the game arcade while the set value is displayed, it is displayed on the first display unit 29A each time the operation is detected. Numerical values are sequentially updated and displayed. Then, when the lock switch 51 is pushed in by a staff member in the game hall or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is set as a new set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1. , In the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage).

  The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on and the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. However, it may be changeable when the power is turned on based on at least the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. For example, even when the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on is not detected when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable based on the detection of the operation of restoring the stored contents at the time of power failure and then pressing the clear switch AK001 to turn it on. Thus, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not initialized by initializing (clearing) the stored contents of the RAM 102 with the start of power supply when the power is turned on, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the power is turned on. Control for changing the set value that has been set may be performed.

  When a new set value is stored, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, special figure reservation storage, general figure reservation storage and game control flag setting section 152, game control timer setting section 153, game control counter Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, etc. may be deleted. In this way, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, a pending storage in which the variable display result becomes a big hit newly occurs due to the change of the set value, and a new normal variable winning ball device 6B. Can be prevented from being released (a common figure hit occurs), and the fluctuation display result during execution can be prevented from being an unreasonable big hit. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special winning opening is closed during the big hit game, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is closed when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is open. This can prevent the player from obtaining inappropriate profits. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new setting value, it is possible to prevent the pending storage from being erased even though the new setting value is not set. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the pending storage is cleared based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the set value originally set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset. In some cases, the hold storage may be cleared. The hold storage may be cleared at the timing when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the setting change process is executed by the CPU 103. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being not accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the form in which the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening are closed based on the setting of a new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The first special winning opening and the second special winning opening may be closed at the timing when the set value being set is displayed, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting changing process. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being not accurately reflected in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  9-22 shows a display mode in a modified example in which the first display unit 29A capable of displaying the set value is not provided on the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display units from the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E, and the continuous ratio, the winning ratio, and the base ratio being displayed on the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E. The setting value is not limited to being displayed on the first display unit 29A, and it is not necessary to provide a display unit for displaying the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the set value of the base being displayed. In FIG. 9-22(A), the display ratio corresponding to the second display part 29B to the fifth display part 29E of the display monitor 29 is displayed as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and corresponds to the first display part 29A. The set value is not displayed on the display.

  FIG. 9-22(B) shows an example of display control of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base when the display section for displaying the set value is not provided. In this case, the set ratio, role ratio, base is red, the set ratio is 2, set ratio, base is green, and the set ratio, role ratio, base is blue. To display. By displaying the continuous ratio, the winning combination ratio, and the base in different display colors depending on the set value, it is possible to easily understand which set value the numerical value is. In this display control example as well, similar to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to switch and display the ratio, winning combination, and base at the set value 1 at intervals of 5 seconds, and at the set value 1 every time the display changeover switch 30 is operated. Changeover ratio, combination ratio, switching display at 5 second intervals to change display at setting value 2 change ratio, combination ratio, switching at 5 second intervals, and further change ratio, combination ratio at setting value 3 , It is only necessary to be able to cyclically change to the switching display of the base at 5 second intervals. Alternatively, switching display of the continuous ratio at the set value 1, the continuous ratio at the set value 2, and the continuous ratio at the set value 3 at 5 second intervals, and the combination ratio at the set value 1, the combination ratio at the set value 2, and the set value 3 The switching display of the winning ratio at 5 second intervals, the switching display of the base at the set value 1, the switching base of the setting value 2 and the switching at the setting value 3 of the base at 5 second intervals are cyclical for each operation of the display changeover switch 30. It may be possible to make various changes.

  The display monitor 29 is not limited to the form that can display the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base for each set value, and the ratio, the combination, or the combination corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3 can be displayed. Only the ratio and the base may be displayed. For example, the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated for each of the set values 1 to 3, and the highest or the lowest value among the calculated continuous ratio, the effective ratio, and the base, or the longest or the shortest measurement time is calculated. Only the value and the like may be displayed on the display monitor 29. Further, the highest or lowest value or the longest or shortest value of the measured time among these calculated ratios, winning ratios, and bases is used as the initial display on the display monitor 29, and the initial display is changed by operating the display changeover switch 30. The display of the display monitor 29 may be switched to the value of.

  The display monitor 29 displays two or more of the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the setting value 1, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the setting value 2, and the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at the setting value 3. It is possible to calculate the ratio, role ratio, and base for each set value, and in addition to or instead of the ratio, role ratio, and base for each set value, the ratio, role ratio, and base for these two or more set values are calculated. It may be displayable on the display monitor 29. In this way, by making it possible to display the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base at the set values of 2 or more on the display monitor 29, it becomes possible to grasp the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in more detail. It should be noted that the composite information is not limited to the form in which the combined ratio, the combination ratio, and the base summed at the two or more setting values can be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29, and the continuous ratio at the two or more setting values is set. The average value of the winning combination and the base may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29.

  The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying only the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set value that has been set. Further, the display monitor 29 displays the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base according to the set value as the initial display, and the operation of the display changeover switch 30 changes the initial display from the other display values. You may switch to display of consecutive ratio, winning ratio, and base. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying numerical values other than the base ratio, the winning combination, and the base as the predetermined information according to the set value, such as the number of prize balls per predetermined time (for example, one hour).

  For example, under a specific condition, such as immediately after the end of a big hit game or during a time saving state, by using a special fluctuation pattern determination table that is different from the normal fluctuation pattern determination table, a variation display with a specific variation pattern than normal ( For example, the shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4) may be easily executed. When it is possible to determine the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table, the determination of the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table is ended and the determination is switched to the normal determination according to the set value that is set. The timing may be different. Specifically, if the set value that is set is 1, the variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table up to the fifteenth variation display after the big hit game ends, and 16 variations after the big hit game ends. After the first time, the variation pattern is determined by using the variation pattern determination table at the normal time, and if the set value is 2, the special variation pattern determination table is displayed up to the tenth variation display after the big hit game ends. The variation pattern is determined using, and after the 11th big hit game, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table in the normal time, and when the set value that is set is 3, the big hit game The variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table up to the fifth variation display after completion, and the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table during normal operation after the sixth time after the jackpot game is over. Good.

  After the initialization (clear) of the RAM 102 is executed in step Sa9 in the main process, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a special change pattern is obtained in the first tenth change. When the variable display is executed, it suggests that the setting value (for example, the setting value 1) advantageous to the player is set, and after the initialization (clear) of the RAM 102 is executed, or the pachinko gaming machine. After the set value set to 1 is changed, when the variable display is executed in a special change pattern at the 30th change, a set value (for example, set value 1) advantageous to the player is set. It is also possible to have a game property in which whether or not the variable display is executed with a special change pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of times of the variable display, such as when it is confirmed that the game is confirmed. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has such a game property, when the set value that is set is 1, the RAM 102 is initialized (cleared) or set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Initialization of the RAM 102 is performed when the rate of execution of the variation in the special variation pattern is the highest in the tenth variation after the set value is changed and the set value is 3. Clear) is executed, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, so that the rate of executing the variation in the special variation pattern is the lowest in the first tenth variation. In addition, only when the set value that is set is 1, after the initialization (clear) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value that is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, first The variation may be executed in a special variation pattern at the 30th variation.

  The switching condition (the number of fluctuations until the table is switched) for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern from the special fluctuation pattern determination table to the normal fluctuation pattern determination table differs depending on the set value. You may decide by a ratio. Due to the different switching conditions for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the set value that is set, the determination rate of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4)) decreases. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing when the game is played, the effect of the variation pattern can be enhanced.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( Until the variable display is executed 100 times, for example, the variable pattern determination table is used when the determination rate of the variable display of the specific variation pattern (for example, the variation display of the super reach variation pattern) is normal. The variation pattern may be increased or decreased as compared with the case of determining the variation pattern. In this case, the execution of the variable display of the change pattern of the super reach may be determined at different determination rates depending on whether the set value is 1, 2, or 3. Good. Thereby, after the initialization (clear) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or Since the player can pay attention to the number of times the variation display of the super reach variation pattern is displayed until the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the effect produced by the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach. Can be increased. Furthermore, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a variable display is performed until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of times. A change pattern that can be determined only until the setting is provided for each set value, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed to the player by executing the change display according to the change pattern according to these set values. Notification may be possible.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( Until the variable display is executed 100 times, for example, the determination rate of the variation pattern other than super reach such as non-reach or normal reach varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a variation pattern different from the normal variation pattern such as non-reach, normal reach, and super reach (for example, the variation time is extremely short such as 0.1). The determination rate of the variation pattern or the variation pattern of which the variation time is extremely long such as 10 minutes) may be different.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested at a rate at which the specific effect is executed until the specific display is executed 100 times). For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a setting value advantageous for the player, and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a specific period. When the value is 1 (the most advantageous setting value for the player), the high setting value suggestion effect is most likely to be executed, and the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (the most disadvantageous setting value for the player). ), the high set value suggestion effect may be most difficult to be executed. In the specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed since the last time the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The determination rates of the fluctuation patterns may be different.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a state of probability after the big hit game is finished, and the game after the big hit game is finished based on the fact that the game ball has passed the third count switch during the big hit game. The state may be controllable to a probable state. In this case, as a big hit type, a big hit type that opens the second big winning opening during the big hit game, that is, a big hit type (hereinafter, big hit X) in which the game ball can pass through the third count switch during the big hit game, Do not open the second big winning opening during the big hit game, that is, a big hit type (hereinafter, big hit Y) that the game ball cannot pass the third count switch during the big hit game, and determine the ratio of these big hit X and big hit Y May be different according to the set value. By doing so, the rate at which the gaming state is controlled to the probable state after the jackpot game is finished can be changed in accordance with the set value that has been set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  In addition to, or instead of, the percentage that the variable display result is a big hit and the determination percentage of the big hit type are different, the number of prize balls when the game ball wins each winning opening, the big prize in each round during the big hit game The upper limit number of game balls to the winning opening may be made different according to the set value that has been set. Further, the opening patterns of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during the big hit game may be different according to the set value that is set. As a result, the number of prize balls to be awarded in the big hit game state can be made different according to the set value, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  A movable body may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a movable body effect may be executed in which the movable body is operated during a game such as a variable display or a big hit game. When such a movable body is provided, it is possible to execute variable winning initialization control such as confirmation of the advancing/retreating operation of the regulating member inside the second special winning opening, and also to confirm the operation of the movable body and set the movable body to the initial position. When the movable body initialization control to be moved is made executable by the production control CPU 120 and a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, or the pachinko gaming machine 1). The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed when a new set value is set to 1. This makes it possible to accurately reflect the new set value in the operation of the restriction member or the movable body. The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed after execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main process. For example, the variable winning initialization control or the movable body initialization control may be executed at the timing when the first timer interruption occurs. When the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable winning initialization control may be started at a timing before the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be started at the same time, and the variable winning initialization control may be ended before the movable body initialization control. This makes it possible to properly perform the initialization control related to the winning of the game ball.

  The determination rate of the super reach variation pattern may differ depending on the set value that is set. The specific variable display pattern may be a variation pattern different from the variation pattern of super reach. The setting of which variation pattern is the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  9-23 and 9-24 show a modification in which the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are installed on the side of the main board 11. By providing the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated unless an attendant of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 3. is there. In addition to this, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the pachinko machine when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed It may be possible to prevent unauthorized setting value change of the gaming machine 1.

  The security cover 500A is attached to the lower portion of the right side of the outer frame 1a. As a result, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A becomes inoperable from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by approaching the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52. Can be On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the security cover 500A is separated from the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 can be operated. The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are covered with a cover from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cover body is covered with the security cover 500A from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. By covering from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (pressing the cover body toward the front by the security cover 500A), it is possible to more strongly prevent an illegal setting value change of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. May be prevented. When the setting switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover body or the security cover 500A instead of the setting switch 52.

  FIG. 9-25 shows a modified example in which a security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be provided slidably in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500B is provided with a lock switch 51 and a setting switch 52 on the back. The state of covering from the side may be immovable. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by slidingly moving the security cover 500B. When the setting switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B instead of the setting switch 52.

  FIG. 9-26 shows a modification in which the security cover is rotatably provided. Specifically, the left end of the security cover 500C may be rotatably supported on a pivot provided in the back side of the gaming machine frame 3 and oriented in the up-down direction. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set as the lock switch 51. The changeover switch 52 may be immovable from the state of being covered from the back side. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot (not shown). When the setting switch 52 is replaced by the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500C instead of the setting switch 52.

  When these security covers are provided so as to overlap the main board 11, the security covers are made of a transparent resin material or the like so as not to interfere with the visibility of the mounting surface of the main board 11 and the seal. Good.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have different game characteristics such as a probability variation loop type and a V probability variation type. In case of probability variation loop type or V probability variation type, there is a function (so-called small hit time) that can increase the number of balls by a small hit that opens the first big winning opening after a specific big hit game ends. You may have. In the case of a gaming machine having the function of small hit time, the big hit probability is changed according to the set value (for example, when the set value is 1, the big hit probability in the normal state is set to 1/200 and the big hit probability in the probability changing state is set. Is set to 1/20, and when the set value is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is set to 1/300 and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is set to 1/30), and when one set value is set, , It is easier to rush into the small hit time because the initial hit probability is higher than when other set values are set, but the probability of a big hit during the probability variation control is also higher than when other set values are set. Since it is also high, it is easy to finish the small hit time. In other words, when the function of the small hit time is installed in the pachinko gaming machine that can execute the probability variation control, the higher the probability that the big hit probability is in the normal state, the higher the probability that the small hit time will be entered. It is difficult for the winning time to continue, and the smaller the probability that the big winning probability is in the normal state is set, the lower the probability of entering the small hitting time, but the easier it is to continue the small hitting time. Therefore, in the probability variation loop type or V probability variation type pachinko gaming machine 1, not only can the range of games be widened by installing a small hit time function, but a set value with a low big hit probability is set. Even with the pachinko gaming machine 1 in use, it is possible to urge the player to play a game.

  In the V-probability variation type pachinko gaming machine 1, the opening pattern of the probability variation control determination big winning opening in the probability variation control determining round is a long-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which a game ball is easy to win in the probability variation control determining large winning opening). ) And a short-term opening pattern (a gaming ball in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to win the probability variation control big winning opening), the long-term opening pattern and the short-term opening pattern are determined according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the actual probability variation probability (proportion of the probability variation big hit) may be different.

  A jackpot type determination gate is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, a position above the second big winning opening), and after the special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, the game ball passes through the jackpot type determination gate. The random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination may be extracted at the timing, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type determined based on the extracted value of MR2 may be started. When the jackpot type determination gate is provided in this way, the jackpot types are determined at different rates according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 16 round jackpots and 4 round jackpots are provided as jackpot types). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state of the 16 round jackpot is the highest, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 If 3 is 3, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 16 round jackpot is the lowest).

  The lock switch 51, the setting switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. In this way, when the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 of the hitting ball operation handle or the hitting ball launching device. By providing the glass door frame 3a in the vicinity, the glass door frame 3a cannot be operated unless it is opened.

  It is only necessary to determine at a different rate according to the set value if it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state advantageous to the player, such as at least the big-hit gaming state. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value that has been set. Depending on the set value, it determines whether the variable display result will be "big hit" or "small hit" at different ratios, while at the same time regardless of the set value, the big hit type In the case of determining a change pattern or a change pattern, the determination rate of the change pattern is not changed even if the set value is changed, so that the set value is not suggested or difficult to suggest to the player or the like. When determining not only the variation display result but also the variation pattern etc. at different ratios according to the set value, the determination rate of the variation pattern is also changed when the setting value is changed, so Can suggest or easily suggest a set value.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes the main process in accordance with the start of the power supply by turning on the power source, thereby the operation by the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001. Depending on the detection result, it is possible to control any of the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the initialization state, and the power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permission state in which the setting value can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001. The setting confirmation state is a state in which the set value that has been set can be confirmed on the display monitor 29. The initialization state is a state in which the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), unlike the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The power failure recovery state is a state in which the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of the power failure.

  FIG. 9-27 shows an example of the state control according to the switch detection when the power is turned on. When the lock switch 51 is turned on and the clear switch AK001 is turned on when the power supply is started by turning on the power based on the operation of the power switch AK002, the setting change process is performed in step Sa13 of the main process. By being executed, the setting change state is controlled. In this case, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process. On the other hand, when the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002 of the main process, and Control the confirmation status. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process, and thus the initialization state is obtained. Control. In this case, since the lock switch 51 is determined to be off in step Sa12 of the main process, the setting change process of step Sa13 is not executed. When the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42 of the main process. By doing so, the power recovery state is controlled. In this case, since the lock switch 51 is determined to be off in step AKS001 of the main process, the setting confirmation process of step AKS002 is not executed. In this way, along with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations such as an on/off switching operation and a pressing operation by an attendant at the game arcade. , It is possible to control the state according to the detection results.

(Explanation of means relating to the above characteristic part)
The above-mentioned embodiment includes the following characteristic portions. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine capable of setting a set value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, a dedicated set value display means for displaying the set value that is set is provided to prevent an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. There was a problem that I could not do it. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion for solving this problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be played using a game medium (for example, a game ball) and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change process of Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
With game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing),
A game in which a game value is added based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first big winning opening, a second big winning opening, etc.) Value adding means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a big hit open process),
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means,
Equipped with
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29).
According to this means 1, since it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value set, it is possible to prevent an increase in the cost of the game machine. You can

As a game machine of means 2 of the above characteristic part,
The information display means can display predetermined information according to the set value (for example, a portion of the display monitor 29 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, a base, etc.).
The gaming machine described in the means 1 is described, and in this means 2, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 of the above characteristic part,
The information display means can sequentially display the predetermined information of each set value (for example, the display monitor 29 displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2). (A part that displays sequentially at 5 second intervals, etc.)
The game machine described in the means 2 is described, and in this means 3, it is possible to easily grasp the predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 of the above characteristic part,
The information display means can display the predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, the set value 1, the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed in red, and the set value 2, the ratio, (The ratio and the ratio are displayed in green, and the set value is 3, the ratio, the ratio, and the base are displayed in blue.)
The gaming machine described in the means 2 or means 3 is described, and in this means 4, the predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 of the above characteristic part,
An operation means (for example, the display changeover switch 30) is provided,
The information display unit can switch and display the predetermined information of each set value in accordance with the operation of the operation unit (for example, by operating the display changeover switch 30, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base of the set value 1 can be displayed. The part where the display is switched to the display of the set value 2, the ratio, the ratio, and the base, and the display of the set ratio 2, the ratio, and the base is changed to the set ratio 3, the ratio, and the base. (Switching part etc.)
The gaming machine described in any one of means 2 to 4 is described, and in this means 5, the predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 of the above characteristic part,
The information display means displays predetermined information according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion that can display only a ratio, a combination ratio, and a base according to the set value set). Such)
The game machine described in any one of the means 2 to 5 is described, and in this means 6, the confirmation work of the predetermined information of the set value set by the setting means is easily performed. be able to.

As a game machine of the means 7 of the above characteristic part,
Calculation means capable of calculating information about the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, CPU 103 has a serial ratio (%) of 6000 pieces, a combination ratio (%), and a cumulative ratio (%), a combination A part for calculating the base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the ratio (%) and the last 60000 prize balls, and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls. Etc.),
The calculation means can individually calculate the information for each set value (for example, a general winning award ball, a first starting mouth award ball, an ordinary electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a prize ball total, The total driving amount is stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value that is set, so that it can be calculated individually for each set value),
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to any one of the set values among the set values (for example, a serial ratio corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3, (Position, the part that can display only the base, etc.)
The gaming machine described in any one of the means 1 to 6 is described, and in this means 7, the information confirmation work can be easily performed.

As a gaming machine of the means 8 of the above characteristic part,
Calculation means capable of calculating information about the game value given by the game value giving means (for example, CPU 103 has a serial ratio (%) of 6000 pieces, a combination ratio (%), and a cumulative ratio (%), a combination A part for calculating the base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the ratio (%) and the last 60000 prize balls, and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls. Etc.),
The calculation means can individually calculate the individual information which is the information corresponding to each setting value, and can calculate the composite information which is the information corresponding to two or more different setting values (for example, (Contribution ratio, combination ratio, the part that calculates the base, etc., summed up for two or more set values),
The information display means can display the information and the composite information (for example, a portion that calculates a continuous ratio, a winning combination, and a base for two or more set values and can display the combined ratio on the display monitor 29).
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7 is described, and according to this means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.

(Explanation of production control regarding other feature parts)
FIG. 9-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-mentioned characteristic portion. This effect control main process may be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main processing of the present embodiment, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the same initialization processing (step AKS011) as in the above-described embodiment, unlike the above-described embodiment, the power-on command processing (step). Execute AKS012). After the power-on command processing is executed, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step AKS013), and if it is turned off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment. The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed and stands by. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be in the off state (step AKS014), command analysis processing (step AKS015), and effect control process processing. (Step AKS016) and random number updating process for effect (step AKS017) are sequentially executed.

  FIG. 9-29 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step AKS012 as power-on command processing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 with the start of power supply as a received command, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9000H which is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). When the received command is not the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether the received command is the command 9200H which is the power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). When the command is not the power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether the received command is the command 9100H which is the setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not the setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9400H which becomes the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If the command is not the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and repeatedly executes steps AKS021 to AKS024 until the received command is obtained and stands by. In addition, when a predetermined error determination time has elapsed without being able to acquire the received command, it may be notified that an error has occurred in the received command.

  When it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is the setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), the game stop state start time process is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state start process, in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped. In the game stop state start time process executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, the command other than the setting change end command is set to invalidate the reception. do it. Thereby, for example, various effects such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during big hit may be restricted so as not to be executed as the game progresses. When the setting change start command is received, when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state, various effects associated with the progress of the game that are executable when the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or limit.

  After the game stop state start time process is executed in step AKS025, control to start setting change notification is performed (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting change notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting change notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the setting change notification sound. Then, control may be performed. After the control of the setting change notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting change is ended (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the received command from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH which is the setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is ended. If the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not ended (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  When it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the display of the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 is ended and the output of the setting change notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is ended. After the control of setting change notification is completed in this way, the game stop state end process is executed (step AKS029). In the processing at the end of the game stop state, the command reception from the invalidated main board 11 may be set to be valid. Thereby, the restriction may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit can be executed.

  Then, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the effect display device 5 in the initialization notification period until the predetermined initialization notification time elapses based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even if it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the initialization notification can be executed by proceeding to step AKS030. In this way, it is possible to notify that the storage content of the RAM 102 has been initialized (cleared) in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 with the start of power supply by turning on the power is detected.

  When it is determined in step AKS024 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), the game stop state start time process is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start time process executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, commands other than the setting confirmation end command are set to invalidate reception. do it. Thereby, for example, various effects such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during big hit may be restricted so as not to be executed as the game progresses. When the setting confirmation start command is received, when the game is in the game stopped state corresponding to the setting confirmation state, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that are executable when the game is not in the game stopped state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or limit.

  After the game stop state start time process is executed in step AKS031, control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting confirmation notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting confirmation notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the setting confirmation notification sound. Then, control may be performed. After the control of the setting confirmation notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is ended (step AKS033). In step AKS033, when the received command from the main board 11 is the command 9401H which is the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined to end the setting confirmation. If the setting confirmation end command is not received and the setting confirmation is not ended (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  When it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS033; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 is ended and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is ended. In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is finished, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). Thereby, the restriction may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit can be executed.

  After that, control for executing the power failure recovery notification may be performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a power failure recovery notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the power failure recovery notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the power failure recovery notification sound. Alternatively, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), the power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the content stored in the RAM 102 has been restored to the content at the time of power failure, corresponding to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected with the start of the power supply when the power is turned on. Good.

  FIG. 9-30 shows control priorities regarding notification and screen display by effect control in the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the power supply is turned on and the power supply is started, the game is stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the game stop state start time process in step AKS025 and step AKS031 of the power-on command process. After the game stop state start time process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and control related to normal effect is not executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities regarding the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen or the like is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen displays the power saving function when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (gaming machine frame 3) is set to a predetermined position as a specific position. It is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable presence/absence, type, and setting of the current date and time by RTC. Since the priority AKP03 for the magnet error notification is lower than the priority AKP02 for the power saving function setting screen or the like, the priority AKP03 is lower than the priority AKP01 for the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, and thus is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. It becomes degree.

  In this way, since the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen and the like, the control for starting the setting change notification is performed in step AKS026 of the power-on command processing. If the control is started or the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to the specific position before the end of the setting change or the setting confirmation. Even if it does, the display of the power saving function setting screen is not started by switching the output amount changeover switch. In this way, the display related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen, is displayed with priority over the display related to the output amount or output control of the effect such as the power saving function setting screen. As a result, the display regarding the set value is appropriately performed, and thus it is possible to prevent the change work of the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation of a modified example relating to effect control in other feature parts)
FIG. 9-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed in the modification in which the setting confirmation processing can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and the set value may be confirmed during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the process after step Sa16 in the main process, the game machine frame 3 is opened by a game attendant or the like, and a switching operation for turning on the lock switch 51 is performed. Since the operation is detected, the display monitor 29 displays the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. This display is not changed even if the setting switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed by an attendant of the game arcade or the like, and is a display for confirming the set value currently set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, the setting confirmation state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is entered, and the setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Then, a command 9400H is transmitted. When the execution of the setting confirmation process ends, the setting confirmation state ends, and the command 9401H that is a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process in the modified example, after the effect random number updating process is executed in step AKS017, the ongoing setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is executed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

  FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS01A as the ongoing setting confirmation process. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting monitor is displaying the set value that can be confirmed on the display monitor 29 (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed during the period after the control in step AKS058 is performed until the control in step AKS060 is performed. When the setting confirmation is not in progress (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, when the setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in progress (step AKS053). In step AKS053, it is determined that the game is not in progress in the period from the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to the reception of the first variation start command and the second variation start command, In other periods, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

  When it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is set to the ON state (step AKS054). The ongoing setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that a setting confirmation start command has been received while the game is in progress. When it is determined in step AKS052 that the setting confirmation start command has not been received (step AKS052; No), after the setting confirmation flag in progress is turned on in step AKS054, waiting for a customer transmitted from the main board 11 is performed. It is determined whether or not the demo designation command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command is not received (step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step AKS055 that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether the ongoing setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056). At this time, if the ongoing setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS056; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing is ended. On the other hand, when the ongoing setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056; Yes), the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed after clearing the ongoing setting confirmation flag and turning it off (step AKS057). (Step AKS058). Even when it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058, and control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed. As a result, when the setting confirmation start command is received while the game is in progress, the setting confirmation notification can be started after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received.

  When it is determined in step AKS051 that the setting is being confirmed (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS060).

  When the setting confirmation process is executed during the game and the set value that is set is displayed on the display monitor 29 by executing the ongoing setting confirmation process, on the production control board 12 side, After receiving the customer waiting demo display command transmitted from the main board 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. As a result, when the set value can be confirmed during execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, the effect being executed is not stopped, and the inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value can be prevented.

  In the case of executing the setting confirmation process during the game on the main board 11 side, the setting confirmation state may be controlled after the customer waiting demonstration designation command can be transmitted. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the production control board 12 together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Alternatively, instead of sending a setting confirmation start command together with a customer waiting demonstration designation command, a special command corresponding to the setting confirmation during the game is transmitted, and the set value set after the progress of the game is completed. You may make it control the state which can confirm.

  Alternatively, the set value that has been set is displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effect display device 5 does not have to perform a display corresponding to the set value. Therefore, when the setting confirmation processing is executed during the game, a display capable of confirming the set value on the display monitor 29 is transmitted without transmitting a setting confirmation start command or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. You may make it control to start. In this case, in the effect control board 12, the control by the effect control CPU 120 or the like may be performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game continues.

  In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change completion notification and the setting confirmation completion notification may be executed. For example, in the power-on command process, the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028, and the setting change end notification is started with the start of the setting change end notification period, and with the end of the setting change end notification period. The setting change completion notification may be terminated. In the power-on command processing, the control in step AKS034 completes the setting confirmation notification, and the setting confirmation completion notification period starts with the start of the setting confirmation completion notification period, and the setting confirmation completion notification period ends. The setting confirmation completion notification may be terminated.

  In the setting change notification, the control may be performed so that the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the setting change notification sound without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed such that the setting confirmation notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification voice, or in place of a part or all thereof, a part or all of the light-emitting members of the game effect lamp 9, or the game effect lamp 9 Control may be performed such that an arbitrary light-emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from is emitted in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to displaying the setting confirmation notification screen and outputting the setting confirmation notification voice, or instead of part or all of the game effect lamp 9, part of the game effect lamp 9 is replaced. Alternatively, control may be performed such that all the light emitting members or any light emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. As described above, the setting change notification may be performed by using an arbitrary performance device or a notification device different from the performance device to notify that the setting value can be changed. The setting confirmation notification may be performed by using an arbitrary performance device or a notification device different from the performance device to notify that the setting value can be confirmed. The configuration change notification and the setting confirmation notification are not limited to the above-described configuration, and one or both of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification may not be performed.

  It is not limited to the form in which the command 93XXH which is the setting change end command and the 9401H which is the setting confirmation end command are prepared. A common setting end command is used as the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command. It may be one that is available. In this case, in the power-on command processing, it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is to be ended when the setting end command is received, and in step AKS033, the setting confirmation is ended when the setting end command is received. Then, it may be determined.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 71AK)
FIG. 9-33 shows a configuration example of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the characteristic portion 71AK of the present embodiment. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 can be operated from the outside through an opening formed in a board case that houses the effect control board 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch capable of detecting a predetermined operation such as a switch changeover operation for initializing a predetermined effect output. It is sufficient that the effect output initially set by the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 includes at least the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the light emission amount of the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included. For example, when an attendant of the game arcade opens the gaming machine frame 3, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes operable. As described above, in the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, opening the gaming machine frame 3 is a condition for changing the initial setting of the effect output. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 initially sets the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, depending on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is switched whether to permit or prohibit change adjustment of the effect output by the player using the stick controller 31A or the like. The effect control CPU 120 may store data indicating such effect output settings in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as output setting information.

  As shown in FIG. 9-33(B), the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”, and the operation is performed by rotating the knob 71AK002 to switch to the channel. The corresponding switch positions can be switched. In the present embodiment, the volume is initially set to any of six levels depending on whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "0" to "F", and the volume adjustment by the player is performed. Whether to permit or not can be switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the effect control CPU 120 directly or via a predetermined circuit, and a changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the effect control CPU 120 to correspond to the channel. The switch position can be specified.

  FIG. 9-34 shows the initial setting control 71AKC01 such as effect output according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In the initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "5", the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is "volume 6 (maximum)". The upper limit volume is initially set to “97.0”, and the volume control (adjustment) by the player is possible (permitted). The volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited, and the output amount of an arbitrary effect device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 may be initially set according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. . When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of "6" to "F", the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is impossible (prohibited), so the effect is set by the initially set effect output. Is executed. In addition, corresponding to the case where the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, the effect display device 5 can display the power saving function setting screen, and whether or not the power saving function is present and the type (power saving mode), and A value indicating the current date and time can be set (changed) by the RTC 126.

  In this way, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is accepted by the knob 71AK002, and based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position. , It is possible to control the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages. In the effect control CPU 120, processing for controlling the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages is executed based on the switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  FIG. 9-35 shows an example of execution of setting change notification, setting confirmation notification, and initialization notification regarding the characteristic part 71AK. In this execution example, as the setting change notification, as shown in FIG. 9-35(A), the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. .. As the setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 9-35(B), the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 9-35(C), the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the initialization notification voice 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the characteristic part 71AK, the power-on command processing is executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing, as in the above embodiment. In this power-on command processing, the setting change notification is started by the control in step AKS026, and the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028. Further, the setting confirmation notification is started by the control in step AKS032, and the setting confirmation notification is ended by the control in step AKS034. Further, the control in step AKS030 starts the initialization notification with the start of the initialization notification period and ends the initialization notification with the end of the initialization notification period. It should be noted that the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to being displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 5, and are part of the display area of the effect display device 5. May be displayed.

  The characteristic portion 71AK is configured to include an output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and the effect output such as sound volume can be initially set to any one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the sound output in the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification is the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1, regardless of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. It may be output at a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 for notifying the message "setting is being changed" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 for notifying the message "setting confirmation is in progress" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, the initialization notification voice 71AKE03 for notifying the message “initialized” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

  In this way, the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is detected in accordance with the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and the output amount of the effect is controlled in any of a plurality of stages based on the detection. In the setting change notification, which is the notification regarding the change of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as the output of the setting change notification sound 71AKE01, the notification is performed with the maximum volume that is the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the production output. . Even in the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, as the output of the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03, the notification may be performed with the maximum volume that is the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output. In this way, since the notification is made by the common output amount, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act from being performed in association with the change or confirmation of the set value and the initialization (clear) of the stored content in the RAM 102.

  FIG. 9-36 shows a display example when the player sound volume adjustment, the power saving function setting, and the like are performed on the characteristic portion 71AK. For example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "0" and the production output has not been adjusted by the player, the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)". FIG. 9-36(A) shows a player sound volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes effect images showing 6 memories corresponding to 6 levels of volume, and the display color of each memory is changed according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)", one memory is displayed in the first display color (for example, red), while the remaining five memories are displayed in the second display color (for example, white). . At this time, the volume setting is changed to "volume 2" in response to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right, and the first volume is displayed on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11. Increases the display color memory by one. In this way, each time the first motion of tilting the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (rightward or the like) is detected, a plurality of stages of effects are produced until the setting of the effect output reaches the maximum. It may be changed so that the output amount is increased step by step. On the other hand, each time the second motion of tilting the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the production output amount of a plurality of stages is set until the production output setting reaches the minimum. It may be changed so as to decrease by one step.

  When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F", the power saving function and the value of the RTC 126 can be set. FIG. 9-36(B) shows a power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 includes a display area for setting the power saving function and a display area for setting the value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC 126. When the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, the presence or absence of the power saving function and the type (power saving mode) of the power saving function are detected depending on the fact that an operation person operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B has detected the operation. Also, the RTC 126 sets (changes) the value indicating the current date and time. In the effect control CPU 120, a process for setting (changing) the power saving function or the like is executed based on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 or the detection of the operation of changing each setting. For example, when it is set to select "power saving mode A" in the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the control for activating the power saving function is performed only during the customer waiting demonstration in which the demo screen is displayed. Anything can be done. In addition, when it is set to select “power saving mode B” in the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, for example, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is displayed during the variable display in addition to the customer waiting demonstration. Any control that activates the power saving function such as reducing the (light emission amount) may be performed.

  FIG. 9-37 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the characteristic portion 71AK. This effect control main process may be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization processing (step 71AKS011) and the power-on command processing (step 71AKS012), as in the above-described embodiment. The initialization process of step 71AKS011 is a process corresponding to the initialization process of step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power-on command process of step 71AKS012 is a process corresponding to the power-on process of step AKS012 in the above embodiment. If After executing the power-on command processing in step 71AKS012, unlike the above embodiment, the start-time output switching processing (step AKS013) is executed. After that, similarly to the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step 71AKS014), and if it is turned off (step 71AKS014; No), the processing of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. And wait. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be in the off state (step 71AKS015), command analysis processing (step 71AKS016), and effect control process processing. (Step 71AKS017) and random number updating process for production (step 71AKS018) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 71AK, the ongoing output changing processing (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the processing returns to step 71AKS014.

  FIG. 9-38 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step 71AKS013 as the start-time output switching processing. In the start-time output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the switch position based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether or not the identified switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032). If the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS032; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS033), and output at the start The switching process ends. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating the switch position corresponding to the channel can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  When it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS032; Yes), control for starting the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so that the effect display device 5 displays the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the settings such as the power saving function. After the control for setting the power saving function is started in this manner, it is determined whether the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating “end” is confirmed on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting is not completed (step 71AKS035; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS036), and the process returns to step 71AKS035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the detection of the operation of pressing the push button 31B, and the like. As described above, the control may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting is completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS037), and the start-time output switching processing is ended. In step 71AKS037, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the power saving function data indicating the presence or absence of the power saving function and the type (power saving mode) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. Further, when the setting for changing the value of the RTC 126 is made, data indicating the changed value is set in the RTC 126.

  FIG. 9-39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 71AKS019 as the ongoing output change process. In the ongoing output changing process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be set in advance as a condition for permitting the adjustment of the production output using the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 during the execution of the production control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the switching permission condition may be satisfied when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. When such a switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on this detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position indicated by the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position specified by the changeover switch signal, and when the comparison result does not match. It may be determined that the switch position has been changed.

  When it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether or not the changed switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054). At this time, when the switch position is other than "F" (step 71AKS054; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, initial output setting data indicating the switch position corresponding to the channel can be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  When it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control for starting the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS056). In this case, the same processing as steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the output switching processing at the start may be executed. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting is completed (step 71AKS057), and when it is not completed (step 71AKS057; No), the control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS058), and step 71AKS057. Return to. After that, when the setting is completed (step 71AKS057; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS058).

  If the switching permission condition is not satisfied in step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), the switch position is not changed in step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), or the control is performed in step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After that, based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is determined whether the player can adjust the volume or the like (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, when the current switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of "0" to "5", it is possible for the player to set (adjust) the volume (correspondence). It may be determined that adjustment by the player is possible. When the adjustment by the player is impossible (prohibited) (step 71AKS060; No), the ongoing output changing process is ended. Note that the switch position is not limited to the determination of whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the switch position may be detected in step 71AKS052 without performing the determination in step 71AKS051.

  When it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the adjustment by the player is possible (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether or not an action for changing the output amount of the effect is detected (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, when the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, based on the detection result of the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, it is possible to detect the operation of changing the effect output amount in multiple stages. It may be determined whether or not there was. When such an operation is not detected (step 71AKS061; No), the ongoing output changing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the motion is detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), control for adjusting the output amount according to the detection result is performed (step 71AKS062), and the ongoing output changing process is ended. In step 71AKS062, when an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, update output setting data indicating the changed volume setting and the like is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. You can do it.

(Explanation of a modification regarding the characteristic part 71AK)
FIG. 9-40 shows the priority of control regarding the notification and screen display by the effect control in the modification of the characteristic portion 71AK. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, when the setting is changed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stopped state in which the progress of the game is stopped. On the other hand, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, when the setting confirmation state is controlled, the game stop state may not be controlled. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the game stop state start time process in step AKS031 of the power-on command process, and in the setting confirmation state, for example, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. You may validate the input of the changeover switch signal which can specify a switch position. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities relating to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen and the like. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game in the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority of the setting change notification AKP11, the power saving function setting screen, etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71AKP12 and further the priority AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification.

  In this way, since the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen and the like, when the control for starting the setting change notification is performed in step AKS026 of the power-on command processing, Even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is changed to the specific position of "F" before the setting change is completed, the detection of the operation of changing over the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is performed. The display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is not started. On the other hand, since the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen and the like, when the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032 of the power-on command processing, When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is changed to the specific position of "F" before the setting confirmation is finished, the power saving is performed based on the detection of the operation of changing over the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. The display of the function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. In this way, control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect may not be executed when changing the set value, while control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect may be executed when confirming the set value. .. This makes it possible to appropriately control the stage of the output amount of the effect as well as the confirmation of the set value when preventing the trouble of changing the set value.

  By executing the power-on command processing in step 71AKS012 and then executing the start-time output switching processing in step 71AKS013, it is possible to detect the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 in the setting change state. However, it is not limited to the mode in which the control of the output amount of the effect is not executed, and whether or not the operation for changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected by the power-on command processing is detected. If it is possible to make a determination and the action is detected, information indicating that the switch position can be specified is stored, and after the setting change state is finished, the output amount control of the effect is controlled based on the stored information. It may be one that does. For example, in the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change has not ended, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the switch position identification result is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. After that, in step 71AKS031 of the start-time output switching process, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be specified based on the information indicating the result of specifying the switch position. Also in this case, in the setting change state, it is possible to restrict not to control the output amount of the effect regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  Alternatively, when it is in the setting change state, it is determined whether or not it is a specific switch position, for example, whether or not the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, and when it is the specific switch position. In addition, the control of displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be given priority over the control of displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 on the effect display device 5. In this case, when the setting change notification is completed by the control in step AKS028 of the power-on command processing, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, which was prioritized, on the effect display device 5 is also ended. It suffices that the display device 5 can start displaying the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12.

  Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting a motion that the player performs a predetermined operation is provided, and the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the motion by the detection device. Good. For example, in addition to or instead of the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001, a set value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as a switching operation and a pressing operation by the player is provided, and the operation of the player is detected by the set value change switch. Based on, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed as in the case where the operation is detected by the clear switch AK001.

  As described above, in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 71AKS012 as in the above embodiment, and the start-time output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command processing, for example, the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start time process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and control related to normal effect is not executed. In this case, the input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also invalidated, so that the adjustment of the production output according to the switch position and the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 are not performed. The control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). In this way, when the power supply is turned on and the power supply is started, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state that allows the setting value to be changed, regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the production. Execution of control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of is limited (prohibited). As a result, the control for changing the set value is prioritized over the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, so that it is possible to prevent the work for changing the set value from being disturbed. Therefore, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls execution of effects according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect is accepted by the knob 71AK002. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect in the case of preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  In the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 71AK, after power-on command processing is executed in step 71AKS012, start-time output switching processing is executed in step 71AKS013. In the start-time output switching process of step 71AKS013, control for switching the initial setting of effect output according to the switch position is performed in step 71AKS033, or control for setting a power saving function or the like is performed in steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037. In this way, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, if the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected before the setting change state is finished, After the setting change state ends, control is performed to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect in the case of preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  When the setting change notification is made by the display screen of the effect display device 5 or the voice output from the speakers 8L, 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is irrespective of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. , Is output at the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, when a notification is made by the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, a fraudulent act is carried out in order to prevent the trouble of changing the set value. Can also be prevented. Therefore, the setting value can be appropriately set.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 71AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 71AK, conventionally, there is a game machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In addition, as a game machine capable of changing settings relating to effects, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2015-29614. However, in the techniques described in JP 2010-200902 A and JP 2015-29614 A, control is not considered when changing effect settings while changing a plurality of settings having different advantages. It was Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in changing the setting value,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game and controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Setting control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permitted state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting means when power supply starts.
Production adjustment detection means capable of detecting an operation relating to the adjustment of the output amount of the production (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001, etc.),
An output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect in any of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the ongoing output change processing of step 71AKS019 is performed. CPU120 for production control to be executed),
In the change permitting state, a limiting unit that limits the execution of the control by the output amount control unit regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection unit (for example, step AKS012 as the power-on command process of step 71AKS012). CPU120 for effect control which executes processing) and the like,
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the execution of the control by the output amount control means is restricted in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 71AK,
Production control means (for example, CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production according to progress of game,
A production control board (for example, a production control board 12) provided with the production control means,
The effect control board further includes a receiving unit (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001) that receives an operation that can be detected by the effect adjusting detection unit.
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 71AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the output amount of the effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic part 71AK,
When the output adjustment control unit detects an operation by the effect adjustment detection unit before the change permission state ends, the output amount control unit operates by the effect adjustment detection unit after the change permission state ends. Control to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of (for example, execution of the output switching process at the start in step 71AKS013)
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 relating to the characteristic part 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the stage of the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic part 71AK,
Different from the operation performed by the player during the game, an initialization detection unit (for example, a clear switch AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine is provided,
In the change permission state, the set value by the setting means can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detecting means (for example, when the clear switch AK001 is used in place of the setting changeover switch 52, etc. ),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic part 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered without separately providing a configuration for changing the setting value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 71AK,
A change notification unit (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) for notifying the change of the set value by the setting unit is provided,
The change notification unit gives notification (for example, output of a setting change notification sound 71AKE01) by a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detection unit.
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 according to the characteristic part 71AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered while preventing the setting value from being changed due to an illegal act.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
The setting confirmation control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation processing of step AKS002) capable of controlling the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means is provided,
The output amount control means,
In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection unit (for example, the setting screen of the power saving function higher than the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification). Priority 71AKP12, etc.),
In the change permission state, the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjusting detection unit is not controlled (for example, the priority of the setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen). 71AKP11 etc.),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 5 according to the characteristic part 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the set value and control the stage of the output amount of the effect, but when changing the set value, the stage of the output amount of the effect is not controlled. It is possible to prevent trouble.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 72AK)
FIG. 9-41 shows an execution example of the power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 include a first movable member that serves as a first movable rendering device and a second movable member that serves as a second movable rendering device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (withdrawal position). After the evacuation position, it is raised diagonally to the right, stopped at the advancing position that overlaps the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then returns to the evacuation position again. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. First to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at this time, with the origin position being in the closed state where they are united. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position in the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5. As a result, after the first movable member has advanced to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the operation motor AK012 brings the first to third split pieces into an open state. On the other hand, when the first movable member is at the origin position, the first to third split pieces cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member slides the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces to the advanced position and then slides them laterally by the operation motor AK013. The slide mechanism of the first movable member uses the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces as the origin position when the first movable member is located at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and sets the first movable member to the left side of the effect display device 5. It suffices if it can be slid between the position and the right position.

  The second movable member stops with the upper position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (withdrawal position). The operation effect of descending from the retracted position, stopping at the advancing position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then returning to the retracted position again is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK014 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position slightly above the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and raised from the advanced position to the retracted position. In this way, the second movable member performs the effect operation of simply reciprocating up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

  The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin position of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that enables the rotation mechanism of the first movable member to move between the original position and the advanced position. The operation motor AK012 provides a driving force that allows the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between the closed state and the open state of the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that enables the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left side position or the right side position of the effect display device 5. The operation motor AK014 provides a driving force that enables the second movable member to move between the original position and the advanced position.

  The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation that performs the same operation as a normal effect operation during execution of effect accompanying the progress of the game. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal effect operation. The short initial operation is an operation that omits a part of the normal effect operation, and is a return operation that returns the first movable member and the second movable member to the original position.

  When the long initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, first, as shown by the solid arrow 72KM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the original position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. To the overlapping position on the front side of the central portion of the display screen in the effect display device 5 which is the advance position. Subsequently, as indicated by a broken line arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved by the driving force of the operation motor AK012 from the closed position at the origin position to the open position. After that, as indicated by a dashed arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as indicated by solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the right movable position by the driving force of the operation motor AK013 and then moved to the left movable position. After that, return to the origin position. Then, as indicated by the solid arrow 72AKM07, the rotating mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advanced position to the original position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. After that, as indicated by broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the original position (retracted position) to the advanced position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014 and then returned to the original position (retracted position).

  When the short initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, the operation may be performed by omitting a part of the long initial operation. For example, among the operations indicated by the arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, control is performed to execute the operations indicated by broken-line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, also in the short initial operation, the operations indicated by solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 are required. In the long initial operation, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member and the second movable member are moved so that the movement amount becomes larger than the movements indicated by the broken line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. May be done. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the movement amount becomes smaller than the operation indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

  In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added depending on the detection result of the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, as an operation of moving the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state which is the origin position, the dashed arrow 72AKM03 The operation motor AK012 is driven so as to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the driving of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. After that, the origin sensor AK021 is turned off and then turned on by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07. The motor AK021 is driven. Further, the second movable member may be moved as indicated by broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09 to drive the operation motor AK024 such that the origin sensor AK024 is once turned off and then turned on.

  FIG. 9-42 shows a control pattern used for driving the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data forming these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, a production operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and a production operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns for the movable member.

  The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute the short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute a long initial operation. The production operation A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the first production executed along with the progress of the game, such as reach production. The production operation B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the second production different from the first production executed along with the progress of the game, such as a preliminary production. . As the control pattern of the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, or some control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive content of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the operation of the movable member.

  FIG. 9-43 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120, regarding the characteristic unit 72AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing may be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 as in the above-described embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). When it is determined in step 72AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS005) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. Control for starting notification is performed (step 72AKS006).

  After the control in step 72AKS006, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007), which is different from the above embodiment. For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads out the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform the control for executing the returning operation for returning the movable member to the origin position in the setting change state as the change permission state. Even in the period after the step 72AKS008 and subsequent steps, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Following the control by step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended, as in the above-described embodiment (step 72AKS008). When the setting change is not completed (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and stands by. When it is determined in step 72AKS008 to end the setting change (step 72AKS008; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 72AKS009), and game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

  After the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS010, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform the control to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed after the short initial operation that is the return operation when the setting is changed as the change permitted state. It is possible to prevent the control. Even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS012), and then control for executing the long initial operation. Is performed (step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the power supply is not started and the control is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial that is the initial operation are performed. Control can be performed to perform the action. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

  Then, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 72AKS014). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before the control for executing the long initial operation. When it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before the control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS012. ..

  When it is determined in step 72AKS004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 72AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start processing is executed (step 72AKS015) as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control for starting notification is performed (step 72AKS016). Then, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS017). By executing the control in step 72AKS017, in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, control for executing the return operation for returning the movable member to the original position It can be performed. Even in the period after the step 72AKS018 and subsequent steps, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Following the control by the step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 72AKS018), as in the above embodiment. When the setting confirmation is not completed (step 72AKS018; No), step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and stands by. When it is determined in step 72AKS018 to end the setting confirmation (step 72AKS018; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 72AKS020).

  After executing the game stop state end process in step 72AKS020, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command process is ended. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 ends, the long initial operation that is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value, the short initial operation that is the return operation is followed by the long initial operation that is the initial operation. It is possible not to control the execution of. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS022), and then control for executing the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS023), the power-on command processing is terminated. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS022 ends. By executing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the power supply is not started and the control is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial that is the initial operation are performed. Control can be performed to perform the action. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 72AKS023 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of a modification regarding the characteristic part 72AK)
FIG. 9-44 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing executed in the modification of the characteristic unit 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. After that, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS031), the control for executing the long initial operation is subsequently performed (step 72AKS032), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014 to perform the control for executing the initialization notification. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 have been initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply when the power is turned on. Correspondingly, the initialization notification is executed by executing the control in step 72AKS014. When the initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that it is possible to perform the control to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation following the short initial operation that is the return operation. . Further, even after the game stop state end time process is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state is ended, and then the return operation is performed. Following the initial operation, it is possible to perform control to execute a long initial operation that is an initial operation. In this way, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 and after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS010, the common control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed. , It is possible to control to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the received command is determined to be the power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002 (step 72AKS002; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020. After that, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS033), the control for executing the long initial operation is subsequently performed (step 72AKS034), and the power-on command processing is ended. When it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command, the stored content in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is restored to the stored content at the time of power failure with the start of power supply by turning on the power. .. When such a power failure recovery is executed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed so that the control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed following the short initial operation as the recovery operation. it can. Also, even after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed to confirm the setting value for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. After the state is completed, control can be performed to execute a short initial operation that is a return operation and then a long initial operation that is an initial operation. In this way, when the received command is determined to be the power failure recovery notification command in step 72AKS002 and after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020, the common control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed. , It is possible to control to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed in response to the initialization notification, or may be controlled to be executed without the initialization notification. Further, the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed in response to the power failure recovery notification, or may be controlled to be executed without the power failure recovery notification. In addition, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the satisfaction of the return operation condition. After the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

  The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation that is a return operation and a long initial operation that is an initial operation can be executed. In the production accompanying the progress of the game, it is sufficient if it can be operated in a predetermined operation mode. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be arbitrarily designated according to the structure of the movable member.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS007. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the movable member such as the first movable member or the second movable member is moved to the origin position when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state which permits the change of the set value. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position. It is possible to prevent the trouble. Therefore, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed to perform a short initial operation that is a return operation. Then, control is performed to execute a long initial operation that is an initial operation. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed. If the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed in the setting change state, execution of the setting change notification may be hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state ends, and the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed in the setting confirmation state. As described above, when the setting change state as the change permission state is set, the long initial operation that is the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, and the setting value change work is not hindered. It is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  When it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, in step 72AKS011, control for executing the long initial operation is performed. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation that is the initial operation. As a result, when preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered, it is possible to prevent unnecessary movement of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing in the modified example of the characteristic unit 72AK, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to perform the return operation. Control is performed to execute a long initial operation that is an initial operation subsequent to the short initial operation. At this time, the control in step 72AKS014 is performed, thereby performing the control for executing the initialization notification. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the stored contents in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), and when the initialization related to the control of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the initialization notification is given. When the initialization notification is performed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation that is a return operation and then a long initial operation that is an initial operation. Also, when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed, so that the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are executed. Take control. Accordingly, when the work of changing the set value is prevented from being hindered, the operation of the movable member can be shared and the control load for operating the movable member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step AKS017. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the movable member such as the first movable member or the second movable member is moved to the origin position when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. After that, when it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended, in step 72AKS021, control for executing the long initial operation is performed. In this way, after the setting confirmation state ends, control is performed to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation. If the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed in the setting confirmation state, execution of the setting confirmation notification may be hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state ends, and the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed in the setting confirmation state. Accordingly, in the case of preventing the trouble of changing the set value, it is possible to easily confirm the set value by preventing the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, from being executed in the setting confirmation state. To do so. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Section 72AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 72AK, there is a game machine which can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a game machine for returning the movable member to the original position, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-212154 do not consider the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member compete with each other. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing the trouble of changing the set value,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is capable of playing a game and controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state)
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Setting control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permitted state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting means when power supply starts.
A movable member operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, etc.),
At least movable control means capable of executing control of return operation (for example, short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and control of initial operation (for example, long initial operation) by the movable member (for example, step AKS012 power-on command processing for executing command processing CPU120 and the like),
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation in the change permission state (for example, execution of step 72AKS007),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation of returning the movable member to the original position is executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the operation of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013).
In the change permitting state, the control for executing the initial operation subsequent to the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 72AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the change-permitted state, thereby preventing the change operation of the set value from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent useless movements of the movable member and prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic part 72AK,
When the game machine is initialized along with the start of the power supply, the initialization notification means for executing the initialization notification (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 72AKS014). Etc.),
The movable control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 accompanying execution of step 72AKS014),
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010).
It may be the gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by standardizing the operation of the movable member and prevent the work of changing the set value from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The setting confirmation control means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation processing of step AKS002) capable of controlling the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting means is provided,
The movable control means,
When in the setting confirmation state, control to execute the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS017),
After the setting confirmation state ends, control to execute the initial operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS021),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic part 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to easily confirm the set value by not performing the initial operation by the movable member in the setting confirmation state, and it is possible to prevent the operation of changing the set value from being hindered.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 73AK)
FIG. 9-45 is a flow chart showing an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120, regarding the characteristic unit 73AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing may be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. Also in the characteristic part 73AK, the operation contents of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be the same as those of the characteristic part 72AK of the present embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 as in the above-described embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). If it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 73AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS005) as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. Control for starting notification is performed (step 73AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). When the setting change is not completed (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and stands by. When it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change (step 73AKS007; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 73AKS008), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, when the setting is changed as the change permitted state, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed. ..

  When it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 73AKS001; Yes), after executing the game stop state end processing in step 73AKS009, control for executing the short initial operation is executed. The operation is performed (step 73AKS010), and then the control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS010 ends. When the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, when the power supply is not started and the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. Can be controlled to execute. Further, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, it is possible to perform the control of executing the short initial operation as the return operation after the setting change state is finished. Alternatively, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, after the setting change state ends, the short initial operation that is the return operation is followed by the long initial operation that is the initial operation. Control can be performed to perform the action.

  Then, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 73AKS012). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before the control for executing the short initial operation or the long initial operation. Alternatively, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed, the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 73AKS004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 73AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS013), and the setting confirmation is performed, as in the above embodiment. The control for starting the notification is performed (step 73AKS014). Then, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS015). By executing the control in step 73AKS015, the control for executing the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. It can be performed. Even in the period after the step 73AKS016 and thereafter, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Following the control by step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 73AKS016). When the setting confirmation is not completed (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and stands by. When it is determined in step 73AKS016 to end the setting confirmation (step 73AKS016; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the power-on command processing is ended. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 ends, the long initial operation that is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is set, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. It is possible not to control the execution of. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS020), and then control for executing the long initial operation. (Step 73AKS021), the power-on command processing is terminated. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS020 ends. When the control in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021 is executed, when the power supply is not started and the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. Control can be performed to perform the action. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by a common process using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be performed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK.

  FIG. 9-46 shows the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during execution of the setting confirmation notification regarding the characteristic portion 73AK. On the setting confirmation notifying screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying the message "setting confirmed" is displayed, and a history of set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of set values may be cumulatively stored on the side of the effect control board 12, for example, by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, the history of the setting values may be stored in a predetermined area in the predetermined area together with the RTC information in a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, as for the history of setting values, in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the setting value information is stored together with the RTC information in the backup area, and the setting confirmation start command is transmitted. In addition, by transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying the history of set values from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the effect control board 12 supplies power. It may be made possible to specify it with the start of.

  When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviating from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the history of setting values is grasped. Hard to do. Therefore, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that it is possible to move the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Control is performed to execute a short initial operation that is a return operation for returning the member to the home position. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, unlike the setting change state, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed. The history of the set values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01 can be easily grasped by an attendant of the game hall or the like. On the other hand, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, so the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When, the control for executing the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation is not performed. As described above, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of the power supply, in the setting confirmation state, the short initial operation as the return operation is executed, while the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after it becomes possible for a staff member of the game hall to easily grasp the history of the setting values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In this case, it is possible to prevent the history of set values from being difficult to grasp due to the movable member.

  It should be noted that the set value history may be displayed even when the setting change state is controlled. In this case, in the setting change state as the change permission state, control for executing the short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position may be performed. As described above, when the set value history can be displayed by controlling the setting confirmation state with the start of the power supply, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed to set the set value. The history may be easily grasped.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001, the control to execute the short initial operation is performed in step 73AKS010. .. On the other hand, when it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command, the control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation that is the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is not executed, so that the operation for changing the set value is not hindered by the return operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value. Therefore, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed, thereby performing control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation. In this way, since the control to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation is performed after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed, it is possible to move when the setting value change work is prevented from being hindered. It is possible to properly return the member to the original position.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to perform the short initial operation that is the return operation. Then, control is performed to execute a long initial operation that is an initial operation. At this time, the control in step 73AKS012 is performed, thereby performing the control for executing the initialization notification. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the stored contents in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), and when the initialization related to the control of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, the initialization notification is given. When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation that is a return operation and then a long initial operation that is an initial operation. Also, when it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation and then the long initial operation that is the initial operation. Take control. This makes it possible to reduce the control load for operating the movable member by making the operation of the movable member common when preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, the history of set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AK004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command, control is performed to execute the short initial operation in step 73AKS015. In this way, when the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of set values, is being displayed, control is performed to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation. As a result, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped in the case of preventing a trouble in changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  Based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, the effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when the command 9100H which is the setting change start command is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H which is the setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11 is different from the command 9000H which is the RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H which is the power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H which is the setting confirmation start command. Thus, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, when the setting change state in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed to be controlled is changed, a command as information different from that in the case where the setting change state is not controlled is transmitted. To be done. As a result, when it is possible to prevent a trouble in changing the set value, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 73AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 73AK, there is a game machine which can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Further, as a game machine for returning the movable member to the original position, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-212154 do not consider the case where the setting change and the operation of the movable member compete with each other. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is capable of playing a game and controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state)
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Setting control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permitted state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting means when power supply starts.
A movable member operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, etc.),
At least a movable control means capable of executing control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position (for example, a production control CPU 120 for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012),
The movable control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010),
When the change permission state is set, control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the original position is not executed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 73AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to properly operate the movable member and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
When the game machine is initialized along with the start of the power supply, the initialization notification means for executing the initialization notification (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 73AKS012). Etc.),
The movable control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute an initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012),
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 relating to the characteristic part 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by standardizing the operation of the movable member and prevent the work of changing the set value from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic part 73AK,
A setting display means (for example, effect display device 5) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming the setting value set by the setting means,
The setting display means can display a history of the set values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01),
When the setting confirmation display is being executed, the movable control means performs control to execute the return operation and does not perform control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015, 73AKS016, etc.),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic part 73AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is being executed, the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped and the setting value changing operation may be hindered. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 73AK,
The production control means for controlling the execution of the production based on the information from the game control means (for example, the production control CPU 120 for executing the command analysis processing of AKS015, etc.),
When the game control means is controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, the game control means transmits different information (for example, a command 9100H which is a setting change start command) from the case where the change permission state is not controlled. ,
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic part 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load of the effect control means and prevent the setting value changing operation from being hindered.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 74AK)
FIG. 9-47 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect, regarding the characteristic part 74AK of the present embodiment. The pattern data forming the effect control pattern 74AKP01 may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. The confirmation effect is controlled to be executable based on the establishment of a predetermined confirmation effect condition after the power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the characteristic portion 74AK is that the left speaker 8L outputs the trumpet sound twice, the right speaker 8R outputs the drum sound twice, and the stick controller 31A outputs the confirmation sound. It also includes a confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operating rod (lever) in a predetermined pattern. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating the confirmation effect process timer initial value 74AKJ00, and enables setting of the initial value of the confirmation effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example. Further, in the production control pattern 74AKP01, the first confirmation production control data 74AKKD01 associated with the confirmation production process timer determination value 74AKJ01, the second confirmation production control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation production process timer determination value 74AKJ02, and confirmation. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound in which the sound of the trumpet is output twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of the confirmation sound in which the sound of the drum is output twice from the right speaker 8R. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used for controlling confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when any of the confirmation effect process timer determination values 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 is matched, the first to third confirmation corresponding to the matched determination value. By performing control using the effect control data 74AKD03, confirmation sound can be output and confirmation vibration can be executed.

  Further, during execution of the confirmation effect, some or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, the lighting of the light emitting member is started and the confirmation sound is output from the left speaker 8L. When the confirmation sound output from the left speaker 8L ends, the confirmation sound output from the right speaker 8R starts. When the output of the confirmation sound from the right speaker 8R ends, the confirmation vibration is started by the vibration motor built in the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operating rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A ends, the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect ends. In the confirmation effect, after the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected within a predetermined confirmation acceptance period, and thus the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. Then, the execution is started. Any one of the confirmation sound output from the left speaker 8L, the confirmation sound output from the right speaker 8R, and the confirmation vibration generated by the vibration motor built into the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A. When the control for executing is performed, the control for executing the other effects is not performed. In this way, when any one of the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is executed, the control may be performed so as not to execute the other effect. In this way, it is possible for a staff member of the amusement hall to easily understand whether or not the production using each production device can be normally executed by outputting the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration at different timings from each other. You can

  FIG. 9-48 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the characteristic portion 74AK. This effect control main process may be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) as in the above embodiment, and then the timer interrupt flag is turned on. If it is OFF (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed and stands by. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be in the off state (step 74AKS014), command analysis processing (step 74AKS015), and effect control process processing. (Step 74AKS016) and random number updating process for effect (step 74AKS017) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the confirmation effect control process (step 74AKS018) is executed, and then the process returns to step 74AKS013.

  FIG. 9-49 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control process. In the confirmation effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization notification is started (step 74AKS031). For example, in the power-on command processing of the above embodiment, the initialization notification is started by performing the control in step AKS030. After that, when the determination in step 74AKS031 is first made, it may be determined that the initialization notification is started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and when the initialization notification start flag is on, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control for starting the confirmation acceptance period is performed (step 74AKS032). The confirmation acceptance period may be started with the start of the initialization notification and may be terminated with the passage of a predetermined confirmation acceptance time such as 30 seconds or 1 minute.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is not started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033). When the confirmation acceptance period is started in step 74AKS032 or when it is determined that the confirmation acceptance period is in step 74AKS033 (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display is started (step 74AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display is started by receiving the first variation start command and the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 11.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is started (step 74AKS034; Yes), control for canceling the confirmation acceptance period is performed (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control processing is ended. In this way, when the variable display is started during the confirmation reception period, the confirmation reception period is stopped and the confirmation performance condition is not satisfied. By stopping the confirmation acceptance period with the start of the variable display, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect by controlling so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, if the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that the operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if there is no motion detection (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the motion is detected (step 74AKS036; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect is read from the predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process is performed. The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set in the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). Further, the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set so that the determination of the timer value is performed (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. In addition, when it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the motion is detected and the setting for executing the confirmation effect is performed, the control for ending the confirmation reception period may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is not during the confirmation acceptance period (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether or not confirmation production is in progress (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is being performed, for example, when the elapsed time measurement by the confirmation effect process timer has started. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not in progress (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether variable display is started (step 74AKS041). When it is determined that the variable display is started (step 74AKS041; Yes), control for stopping the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS042), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. In this way, when the variable display is started during the confirmation effect, the execution of the confirmation effect is stopped so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap. The confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the variable display is not started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect process timer has timed out (step 74AKS044). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 74AKS044; Yes), control for ending the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS046 that the determination value matches the determination value (step 74AKS046; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). Moreover, after setting is made so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control processing is ended.

  FIG. 9-50 is a timing diagram or the like showing a control example of confirmation effect with respect to the characteristic portion 74AK. In FIG. 9-50(A), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 to ON is not detected. Correspondingly, the case where the setting change state is not controlled is shown. In FIG. 9-50(B), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, and the operation of switching the lock switch 51 to ON is detected. In the case of being controlled to the setting change state in response to the above. FIG. 9-50(C) shows the control content at each timing.

  When the setting change state is not controlled due to the start of power supply by turning on the power at timing 74AKT01, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the RAM clear notification command is received at timing 74AKT02. .. In the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in step AKS030 is performed and the initialization notification is started. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, it is determined that the initialization notification is started in step 74AKS031, and the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. It When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT03 within this confirmation detection period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. The control for executing the confirmation effect such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048 is started. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this manner, a plurality of types of the first to third confirmation effects are obtained by using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The effects are executed in order. After that, at timing 74AKT04, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and control is performed in step 74AKS045, whereby the confirmation effect ends.

  On the other hand, in the case where the setting control state is controlled in accordance with the start of the power supply by turning on the power at timing 74AKT11, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 issues the setting change start command at timing 74AKT12. It is determined that it has been received. In the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, since it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is the setting change start command, after the game stop state start processing of step AKS025 is executed, the control of step AKS026 is performed. Then, the setting change notification is started. At this time, except for the case where the setting change end command is received, control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and control for executing the initialization notification is not started. After that, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 74AKT13, it is determined that the setting change is ended at the step AKS027 of the power-on command processing, so that it follows the steps AKS028 and AKS029. The control of step AKS030 is performed, and the initialization notification is started.

  In this way, when the initialization notification by the control of step AKS030 is started at the timing 74AKT13, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the initialization notification is performed at step 74AKS031. It is determined that the confirmation acceptance period has started and the confirmation acceptance period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. Therefore, at the timing 74AKT13, the confirmation acceptance period starts with the start of the initialization notification. When the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT14 within the confirmation reception period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process, and the confirmation effect control process is performed. The control for executing the confirmation effect is started, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048. By starting the control for executing the confirmation effect in this manner, a plurality of types of the first to third confirmation effects are obtained by using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The effects are executed in order. After that, at timing 74AKT15, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control processing that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, whereby the confirmation effect ends.

  The effects included in the confirmation effect may be effects using any effect device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or in place of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the push button 31B. May be able to execute.

  As described above, in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 74AKS012 as in the above embodiment, and then the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command processing, for example, the game stop state start processing is executed in step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start time process is executed, reception of a command different from the setting change end command and the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and control related to normal effect is not executed. In this case, control for executing the confirmation effect is also not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control is performed to execute initialization notification in step AKS030. After that, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied, for example, when it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification is started, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and the subsequent steps. Perform control to execute. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed when the setting change state in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is allowed to be changed is controlled. As a result, the control for changing the set value is prioritized over the control for executing the confirmation effect, so that it is possible to prevent trouble in the work for changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set value.

  In the power-on command processing, the control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed corresponding to the setting change state. After that, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, the control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. To do. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect in the case of preventing a trouble in changing the set value. Therefore, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. In the confirmation effect control process of the characteristic part 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed to enter the confirmation acceptance period. Then, in step 74AKS036, it is determined that the start operation is detected, and thus the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. . This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect in the case of preventing a trouble in changing the set value. Therefore, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  When the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the characteristic part 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the stored contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled to the setting confirmation state. In this case, the confirmation acceptance period is the same as when the setting confirmation state is completed. The control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period. Accordingly, when the work of changing the set value is prevented from being hindered, the control relating to the execution of the confirmation effect can be shared, and the control load of the confirmation effect can be reduced. Therefore, the setting value can be appropriately set.

  The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the characteristic unit 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, thereby enabling control to output the confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, the confirmation effect includes the output of the confirmation voice by the speakers 8L and 8R which are the sound output means. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect in the case of preventing a trouble in changing the set value. Therefore, the setting value can be appropriately set.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 74AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic unit 74AK, there is a game machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a game machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation compete with each other. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK for providing a gaming machine that can prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is capable of playing a game and controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state)
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Setting control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permitted state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting means when power supply starts.
Production means capable of executing production (for example, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.),
After the power supply is started, a confirmation control means capable of executing the confirmation effect control by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation effect control processing of step 74AKS018). Equipped with
The confirmation control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS021 and AKS030, etc.). ),
In the change permission state, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029),
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect is not executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent a trouble in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect in response to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS025 to AKS030). ),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
It is provided with a game detecting means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting a motion by the player,
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means during the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 74AKS036),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 relating to the characteristic part 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means, when initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period common to the case where the change permission state ends. Control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS036),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the execution of the confirmation effect and prevent the setting value changing operation from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
A sound output unit (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting effect sound is provided,
The confirmation effect includes an output of a confirmation voice by the sound output unit (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work of changing the set value from being disturbed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 75AK)
FIG. 9-51 is a flow chart showing an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 with respect to the characteristic part 75AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing may be executed in step 74AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 74AK of the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 as in the above-described embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). When it is determined in step 75AK003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 75AKS005) as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. Control for starting notification is performed (step 75AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not the setting change is completed (step 75AKS007). When the setting change is not completed (step 75AKS007; No), unlike the above embodiment, the setting change confirmation effect control process is executed (step 75AKS008), and then the process returns to step 75AKS007. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, the setting change confirmation effect control processing is executed in step 75AKS008, so that the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply. When, the control for executing the confirmation effect can be performed. When it is determined in step 75AKS007 to end the setting change (step 75AKS007; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 75AKS009), and game stop state end processing is executed (step 75AKS010).

  When it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 75AKS001; Yes), after the game stop state end process is executed in step 75AKS010, control for executing initialization notification is executed. Then (step 75AKS011), the power-on command processing is terminated.

  When it is determined in step 75AKS003 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), after the processing corresponding to the setting confirmation state is executed (steps 75AKS012 to 75AKS016) as in the above embodiment. ), power-on command processing ends. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, when the setting change state is controlled with the start of the power supply, the setting change confirmation effect control process of step 75AKS008 is executed, while the setting confirmation state is set. When controlled, the process corresponding to the setting effect confirmation effect control process is not executed. Therefore, while the control for enabling the confirmation effect is performed in the setting change state, the control for enabling the confirmation effect is not performed in the setting confirmation state.

  FIG. 9-52 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 75AKS008 as the setting change confirmation effect control process. In the confirmation production control process during setting confirmation, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not confirmation production has been completed (step 75AKS031). In step 75AKS031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been completed. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the ON state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been completed in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the setting effect confirmation effect control process ends.

  When it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been completed (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is in progress (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not being performed (step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not there is an operation detection for starting the confirmation effect (step 75AKS033). When there is no motion detection in step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; No), the setting change confirmation effect control process ends. If it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the motion is detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read as the setting for starting the execution of the confirmation effect (step 75AKS034), and the confirmation effect process timer is initialized. The value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). In this way, in the setting change confirmation production control process, the determination in step 75AKS033 is performed, so that in the setting change state as the change permission state, an arbitrary period is not provided, such as a confirmation reception period. The confirmation effect condition is satisfied and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started by, for example, detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B at the timing.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032; Yes), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038). ). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), control for ending the confirmation effect is performed (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS040 that the determination value matches (step 75AKS040; Yes), the effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). Further, after setting is made so that the timer value is determined by the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control processing is ended.

  FIG. 9-53 is a timing diagram or the like showing a control example of confirmation effect with respect to the characteristic portion 75AK. In FIG. 9-53(A), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 to ON is not detected. Correspondingly, the case where the setting change state is not controlled is shown. In FIG. 9-53(B), when the power supply is started by turning on the power, the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, and the operation of switching the lock switch 51 to ON is detected. In the case of being controlled to the setting change state corresponding to. FIG. 9-53(C) shows the control contents at each timing.

  When the setting change state is not controlled with the start of the power supply by turning on the power at the timing 75AKT01, it is similar to the case where the characteristic portion 74AK is not controlled to the setting change state, and the RAM clear notification command is received at the timing 74AKT02. As a result, the initialization notification is started, and along with this, the confirmation acceptance period is started. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at timing 75AKT03 within the confirmation acceptance period, the control for executing the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. Using, the plurality of types of effects, which are the first to third confirmation effects, are sequentially executed. After that, at timing 75AKT04, the confirmation effect ends.

  On the other hand, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply at the timing 75AKT11, the setting change is performed at the timing 75AKT12, unlike the case where the characteristic part 74AK controls the setting change state. Since the start command is received, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the power-on command processing that the received command is the setting change start command. As a result, following steps 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined in step 75AKS007 whether or not the setting change is to be ended. If it is not ended at this time, the setting change confirmation effect control process is executed in step 75AKS008. It In the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not in progress, it is determined in step 75AKS033 whether or not the start operation is detected. In this way, in the setting change state as the change permission state, the confirmation effect condition can be established by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B. For example, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 75AKT13 in the setting change state, it is determined that the confirmation effect start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the setting change confirmation effect control process. The control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the confirmation effect control process during the setting change, is started. In this way, a plurality of types of effects to be the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed by using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. After that, at timing 75AKT14, the confirmation effect ends.

  When the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 75AKT15 after the timing 75AKT14, it is determined that the setting change is ended at the step 75AKS007 in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK. As a result, the control of step 75AKS011 is performed subsequent to steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, and the initialization notification is started. When the initialization notification is started, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, similarly to the case of the characteristic part 74AK, so that the confirmation acceptance period is started. Good. Then, when the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected in the confirmation reception period, the control for executing the confirmation effect may be started again.

  As described above, the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK includes the setting change confirmation effect control processing executed in step 75AKS008, and the start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the setting change confirmation effect control processing. If it is determined that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and subsequent steps to execute the confirmation effect control. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the control is executed to execute the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition when the setting change state is permitted to allow the change of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, by enabling the confirmation effect when the setting is changed as the change permitted state, it is possible to accurately check the state of the gaming machine and hinder the work of checking the state of the gaming machine. It can be prevented.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 75AK, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 75AKS001, the confirmation reception control processing similar to that of the characteristic portion 74AK is executed, thereby confirming acceptance. The period begins. During the confirmation acceptance period, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. On the other hand, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change, when it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation is detected without providing the confirmation acceptance period, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed. As a result, the confirmation effect can be executed at any time when the setting is changed as a change permission condition, so that the confirmation effect can be changed along with the change of the set value in order to prevent any trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine. You can do it properly.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 75AK, the control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed corresponding to the setting change state. After that, the confirmation acceptance control period is started by executing the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the characteristic portion 74AK. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the control for executing the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period is performed, which causes a hindrance to the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine. To prevent this, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to be able to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by the player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation is detected, and thus the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. The confirmation effect control process similar to that of the characteristic unit 74AK is executed, and it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the start operation is detected, and thus the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the work for confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 75AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 75AK, conventionally, there is a game machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a game machine that performs control to output a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-220833. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-220833 do not consider the case where the setting change and the effect for confirmation conflict with each other. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work for checking the state of the gaming machine may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 75AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing the trouble of checking the state of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game and controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Setting control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permitted state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting means when power supply starts.
Production means capable of executing production (for example, production display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.),
After the power supply is started, a confirmation control means capable of executing the confirmation effect control by the effecting means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, the setting effect confirmation effect control of step 75AKS008). CPU120 for effect control for executing processing) and the like,
The confirmation control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018). ),
In the change permission state, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of the setting effect confirmation effect control process in step 75AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the confirmation effect can be executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to accurately check the state of the gaming machine and prevent the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being hindered. .

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means,
When initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period (for example, step 74AKS033). , 74AKS036 execution, etc.),
In the change permission state, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition without providing a confirmation acceptance period (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of confirming the state of the gaming machine by appropriately executing the confirmation effect along with the change of the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic part 75AK,
The confirmation control means performs control to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation acceptance period after the change permission state ends (for example, step after executing steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011). 74AKS018 execution),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic part 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work for confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic part 75AK,
It is provided with a game detecting means (for example, push button 31B, push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an operation by the player,
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the motion by the game detecting means (for example, execution of step 75AKS033),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the work for confirming the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 100AK)
FIG. 10A is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process processing executed by the effect control CPU 120, regarding the characteristic unit 100AK of the present embodiment. This effect control process process may be executed instead of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7 in the above embodiment.

  In the effect control process process of the characteristic part 100AK, the effect control CPU 120 first starts the setting suggestion effect for determining (deciding) whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect which suggests the set value to the player. The process is executed (step 100AKS101). In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the timing suggestion effect that suggests the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed to the player before the setting suggestion effect is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the timing suggestion effect, so that the interest of the game is improved and the operation rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is improved. Can be planned. In the setting suggestion effect start process of step 100AKS101, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect, the timing suggestion effect is started. Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes setting suggestion effect execution processing for executing the setting suggestion effect (step 100AKS102). After that, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps S161 to S171, similarly to the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7 in the above-described embodiment.

  FIG. 10-2(a) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step 100AKS101 of FIG. 10-1 as the setting suggestion effect start process. In the setting suggestion effect start process shown in FIG. 10-2(a), the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the timer value of the start determination timer 100AK001 shown in FIG. 10-2(b) is different from 0. It is determined (step 100AKS201). The start determination timer 100AK001 is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as shown in FIG. 10-2(b), and measures the duration of the slump state. In the slump state, the variable display of the first special diagram and the second special diagram is executed based on the fact that the first starting condition and the second starting condition are not satisfied even though the player is playing the game. Instead, it refers to the state where the progress of the game is stopped.

  When it is determined that the value of the start determination timer 100AK001 is 0 (step 100AKS201; No), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed is turned on. It is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (step 100AKS202). The customer waiting demo flag is set to the ON state when the production control board 12 receives the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 11. When it is determined that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not being executed (step 100AKS202; No), the setting suggestion effect start process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (step 100AKS202; Yes), it is determined whether or not the launch detection flag indicating that the launch of the game ball has been detected is on. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the launch of the game ball is detected (step 100AKS203). In the present embodiment, a launch detection sensor capable of detecting the launch of a game ball is provided in the hit ball launching device. When the launch of the game ball is detected by the launch detection sensor, a launch detection signal indicating that the launch of the game ball has been detected is transmitted from the hit ball launching device to the main board 11. When the main board 11 receives the launch detection signal transmitted from the hitting ball launching device, it sends a launch detection command indicating that the launch of the game ball has been detected to the effect control board 12. The firing detection flag is set to the ON state when the production control board 12 receives the firing detection command transmitted from the main board 11. When it is determined that the game ball has not been emitted (step 100AKS203; No), the setting suggestion effect start processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has been emitted (step 100AKS203; Yes), the start determination timer 100AK001 starts measuring the time (step 100AKS204). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the progress of the game is stopped based on the determination that the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (step 100AKS202; Yes), and the launch of the game ball is detected. If it is determined that the player is playing the game based on the determination (step 100AKS203; Yes), it is determined that the player is in the slump state, and a start determination timer that measures the duration of the slump state. Start measuring time with 100AK001.

  When it is determined that the timer value of the start determination timer 100AK001 is different from 0 (step 100AKS201; Yes) or after the process of step 100AKS204 is performed, a predetermined value is determined based on the timer value of the start determination timer 100AK001. It is determined whether the production start condition is satisfied (step 100AKS205). In this embodiment, the effect start condition is that the duration of the slump state is a predetermined first reference time (for example, 20 seconds) or more. The duration of the slump state may be acquired as the timer value of the start determination timer 100AK001. The production start condition may be that the number of shot balls in the slump state is equal to or larger than a predetermined reference number (for example, 50). In this embodiment, the main board 11 indicates the number of shot balls (the number of times the shot game balls have been detected) based on the signal from the discharge port switch 70 for detecting the shot game balls. A few commands are transmitted to the production control board 12. When the production start condition is set to the condition related to the number of shot balls, the production control CPU 120 receives the number of shot balls in the slump state from the main board 11 while the time measurement by the start determination timer 100AK001 is being executed. It may be detected based on the ball count command. The number of launch balls may be detected based on a ball lending signal supplied from the ball lending machine and indicating the number of game balls lent by the ball lending machine. In this case, the ball lending signal may be supplied from the ball lender to the effect control board 12 via the main board 11, or may be directly supplied from the ball lender to the effect control board 12.

  When it is determined that the effect start condition is satisfied (step 100AKS205; Yes), the setting for executing the setting suggestion effect such as the determination of the effect pattern is performed (step 100AKS206).

  In the present embodiment, three effects of a first stage effect, a second stage effect and a third stage effect are executed stepwise as setting suggestion effects. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the timing suggestion effect includes an effect mode in which a predetermined first condition is suggested, an effect mode in which a predetermined second condition is suggested, and an effect mode in which a predetermined third condition is suggested. It is possible to execute in. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the timing suggestion production in various production modes, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The first stage effect is executed when the first condition is satisfied after the first suggestion effect which is the timing suggestion effect of the effect mode suggesting the first condition is executed, and the second stage effect is the second condition. It is executed when the second condition is satisfied after the second suggestion effect, which is the timing suggestion effect of the suggestion mode, is executed, and the third stage effect is the timing suggestion effect of the effect mode that suggests the third condition. It is executed when the third condition is satisfied after the third suggestion effect is executed. The third condition is a condition that is more difficult to be satisfied than the second condition (it takes more time to be satisfied), and the second condition is a condition that is more difficult to be satisfied than the first condition. In the present embodiment, the first condition is that the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure after the effect start condition is satisfied is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (for example, 20 times). In addition, in the present embodiment, the second condition is that the period during which the game is executed after the effect start condition is satisfied becomes a predetermined second reference time (for example, 15 minutes) or more. The period relating to the second condition elapses only while the game is being executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the third condition is that the number of shot balls after the production start condition is satisfied is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number (for example, 2000). In this way, by gradually executing the setting suggestion production, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, and to fuel the player's motivation to continue the game and to improve the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1. You can It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect is not limited to being executed in three stages, and two or less stages of effects may be executed as the setting suggestion effect, or four or more stages of effects may be executed. Further, it is also possible to decide how many stages of effect as the setting suggestion effect, by random number lottery or the like.

  In this embodiment, as the first condition, the second condition and the third condition, the condition relating to the number of times of variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram, the condition relating to the period, and the number of shot balls, respectively. The conditions relating to and are described as being set, but this is merely an example. At least two or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions relating to the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure, or the first condition, the second condition, and the At least two or more of the third conditions may be conditions related to the period, or at least two or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions related to the number of shot balls. . That is, all of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions relating to the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure (for example, the first condition is the production start condition. The number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure after the establishment is 20 times or more, and the second condition is the first special figure or the second special figure after the performance start condition is established. The number of times of variable display in the figure is 40 times or more, and the third condition is that the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is 60 times or more after the production start condition is satisfied. The first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may all be the conditions related to the period, and the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may all be the number of shot balls. It may be the condition. In addition, in the present embodiment, as one of the conditions for executing the setting suggestion effect, a condition (second condition) relating to a period that elapses only while the game is being executed is described, As a condition for executing the setting suggestion effect, a condition for an elapsed period may be set regardless of whether or not a game is being executed. In this case, the elapsed period regardless of whether or not the game is being executed may be acquired based on the time information output by the real time clock (RTC) 126, for example.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes any one of effects (setting suggestion effect) A to effect E shown in FIG. 10-3A as the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. The effect A is an effect in which an image representing a message "Is the setting not bad?" is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect B is an effect of displaying an image representing the message "Settings are not bad!" on the image display device 5. The effect C is an effect of displaying an image representing the message “Settings are not bad!” on the image display device 5. The effect D is an effect of displaying an image representing the message “Today is lucky!” on the image display device 5. The effect E is an effect of displaying an image representing the message "It's the best setting!" on the image display device 5. The degree of expectation of performance E is higher than that of performance D, the degree of expectation of performance D is higher than that of performance C, the degree of expectation of performance C is higher than that of performance B, and the degree of expectation of performance B Is higher than the expectation of performance A. The expectation level of the effect is a rate at which the effect is executed when the most advantageous setting value 1 is set. That is, the higher the degree of expectation of the effect, the lower the rate of execution of the effect when the most disadvantageous setting value 3 is set.

  In the present embodiment, as the setting suggestion effect, one of effects A to E shown in FIG. 10-3(a) is executed, but the type of setting suggestion effect is shown in FIG. 10-3(a). ) Is not limited to each effect shown. For example, when the set value has four or more stages (for example, when the set value has six stages from 1 to 6), as a setting suggesting effect, an effect that suggests that the setting value is an even number (for example, “even setting? The effect of displaying the image representing the message "on the image display device 5) may be executed. Alternatively, as the setting suggesting effect, an effect indicating that the setting value is an odd number (for example, an effect of displaying an image showing a message “odd number setting?” on the image display device 5), and the most advantageous setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous. That indicates that the setting value 2 is set to a different setting value 3 (for example, an image that displays an image indicating that "the setting cannot be said" is displayed on the image display device 5), or a specific setting value. Execution that suggests that it has been set (for example, an effect that displays an image showing a message such as "Set 1 confirmed!", "Setting 2 confirmed!", "Setting 3 confirmed!", etc. on the image display device 5) and the like. You may. Alternatively, as the setting suggesting effect, an effect indicating that the setting value set to a setting value different from the setting value set yesterday is set (for example, an image representing a message "A setting different from yesterday?" is displayed on the image display device 5). May be displayed). It should be noted that this effect may be executed when it is determined that the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Alternatively, as the setting suggesting effect, an effect indicating that the setting value is set to be more advantageous than the setting value set yesterday (for example, an image representing a message "Is the setting better than yesterday?" is displayed on the image display device 5). The effect displayed on the image display device 5 or an effect indicating that the setting value is set to be less favorable than the setting value set yesterday (for example, an image representing a message "is it worse than yesterday?"). May be displayed). In this case, the effect control board 12 includes a non-volatile storage device such as a flash memory, and this storage device does not erase the data indicating the set value of yesterday in a non-volatile manner (even when the RAM clear process is executed. ), and the effect is executed based on this data.

  In the present embodiment, as the setting suggesting effect, description will be made as executing the effects A to E shown in FIG. 10-3(a) for displaying various images on the image display device 5, but the setting suggesting effect. Is not limited to this, and any set value set by displaying an image, outputting a sound, lighting a lamp (for example, a 7-segment LED), operating a role, or a combination thereof can be suggested. Good.

  In the process of step 100AKS206, the effect control CPU 120 determines any one of pattern 1 to pattern X shown in FIG. Which of the effects A to E is to be executed as the effect and the third stage effect is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-3(b), in Pattern 1 to Pattern 3, any of the effects A to E is set as the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. In this embodiment, the effect E with the highest degree of expectation is executed only when the pattern X is determined as the effect pattern. In each pattern shown in FIG. 10-3(b), an effect having a higher degree of expectation than the effect set as the first stage effect is set as the second stage effect, and is set as the second stage effect. An effect with a higher degree of expectation than an existing effect is set as the third stage effect. Therefore, as the setting suggestion production progresses in stages, the degree of expectation of the production to be executed becomes higher, which can improve the interest of the game, and also encourages the player to continue playing the game and pachinko. The operating rate of the gaming machine 1 can be improved.

  In Patterns 1 to X shown in FIG. 10-3(b), although different effects are set as the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect, the setting suggesting effect is produced. The pattern is not limited to this, and at least two or more of the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect may be the same effect. In the present embodiment, the effect E with the highest degree of expectation is described as being executed only when the pattern X is determined as the effect pattern, but when a pattern other than the pattern X is determined as the effect pattern. The effect E may be configured to be executable.

  In the process of step 100AKS206, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern at the ratio shown in FIG. 10C, according to the set value that is set. The set value that has been set may be acquired based on the EXT data corresponding to the set value newly set by the change in the setting change end command received from the main board 11. In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10C, the pattern X is determined as the effect pattern only when the most advantageous setting value 1 is set.

  In the present embodiment, the description will be made assuming that the effect modes of the first stage effect, the second stage effect and the third stage effect are collectively determined by executing the process of step 100AKS206 at the start of the setting suggestion effect. However, the method of determining the production mode is not limited to this, and the production modes of the first stage production, the second stage production, and the third stage production may be determined respectively.

  After performing the processing of step 100AKS206, the CPU 120 for effect control, as the timing suggestive effect, the first suggestive effect that suggests the timing at which the first stage effect is executed corresponding to the satisfaction of the first condition, the second suggestive effect. A second suggestive effect that suggests the timing at which the second stage effect is executed in response to the satisfaction of the condition, and a timing at which the third stage effect is executed in response to the satisfaction of the third condition The third suggestion effect is started (step 100AKS207). When the timing suggestion effect is started in the process of step 100AKS207, the timing suggestion effect execution flag indicating that the timing suggestion effect is being executed is set to the ON state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, as the first suggestive effect, the first special figure or the second special figure executed by the timing when the first stage effect is executed corresponding to the satisfaction of the first condition. The effect of displaying on the image display device 5 an image that indicates the number of times of variable display is started. The display of the number of times of this variable display is updated as the game progresses. As the second suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image indicating the period in which the game is executed until the timing at which the second stage effect is executed in response to the establishment of the second condition. Start the display effect. Note that the display of this period is updated as the game progresses only while the game is being executed. The effect display control CPU 120 displays, on the image display device 5, as the third suggestive effect, an image that suggests the number of shot balls until the timing at which the third stage effect is executed in response to the establishment of the third condition. Start directing.

  The first suggestive effect started in the process of step 100AKS207 ends when the first stage effect is started. The second suggestion effect started in the process of step 100AKS207 ends when the second stage effect is started. The third suggestion effect started in the process of step 100AKS207 ends when the third stage effect is started. That is, in the period from the execution of the process of step 100AKS207 to the start of the first stage effect, the first suggestive effect, the second suggestive effect, and the third suggestive effect are executed in parallel, and the first stage effect. During the period from when the second stage effect is started until the second stage effect is started, the second suggestive effect and the third suggestive effect are executed in parallel.

  As described above, at least two or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions relating to the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure. Correspondingly, at least two or more of the first suggestive effect corresponding to the first condition, the second suggestive effect corresponding to the second condition, and the third suggestive effect corresponding to the third condition execute the setting suggestive effect. It may be an effect that suggests the number of times of variable display of the first special drawing or the second special drawing that is executed by the timing. Further, as described above, at least two or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions relating to the period, and correspondingly, the first suggestion corresponding to the first condition Even if at least two or more of the effect, the second suggestive effect corresponding to the second condition, and the third suggestive effect corresponding to the third condition are effects that suggest a period until the timing at which the setting suggestive effect is executed. Good. Further, as described above, at least two or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions relating to the number of shot balls, and correspondingly, the first condition corresponding to the first condition. At least two or more of the 1 suggestion effect, the 2nd suggestion effect corresponding to the 2nd condition, and the 3rd suggestion effect corresponding to the 3rd condition suggests the number of shot balls until the timing at which the set suggestion effect is executed. May be

  As described above, as the condition for executing the setting suggestive effect, a condition for the elapsed period may be set regardless of whether or not the game is being executed, and correspondingly, the timing suggestive effect As an alternative, the elapsed period may be displayed regardless of whether or not the game is being executed.

  In the present embodiment, as the timing suggesting effect, an effect of displaying various images on the image display device 5 will be described, but the effect mode of the timing suggesting effect is not limited to this, and an image display, a voice Output, lighting of a lamp (for example, a 7-segment LED), operation of a winning combination, a combination thereof, or the like, as long as the execution timing of the setting suggesting effect can be suggested.

  In this embodiment, when the production start condition is satisfied based on the slump state, the timing suggestion production is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the slump state, to fuel the player's motivation to continue the game, and to improve the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In this embodiment, the timing suggesting effect is started when the effect starting condition is satisfied based on the slump state, but the effect starting condition is not limited to this. For example, when the random number lottery is won after the game is started, it may be determined that the effect start condition is satisfied and the timing suggestion effect may be started. Whether or not the game has started may be determined by, for example, determining whether or not a firing detection command has been received. In this case, after a predetermined timing after the game is started (for example, the timing when the number of shots is 750 or more), the random number lottery is won at a higher rate than before the predetermined timing. The determination values may be distributed so that In this case, an image showing the number of shot balls may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined timing in a customer waiting state in which a game is not executed (for example, a timing when 5 minutes or more has passed without receiving a launch detection command after receiving a customer waiting demo designation command) The timing suggestion effect may be started by determining that the start condition is satisfied. According to this configuration, the operation rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved by attracting the interest of the player who has not started playing the game and inspiring the player to start the game.

  Alternatively, the timing suggestion effect may be started at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure. In this case, when the predetermined timing comes after the reach effect is started, the player does not perform the timing suggestion effect in order to avoid confusing the timing suggestion effect with the notice effect. It is preferable. Furthermore, it is preferable not to execute the timing suggestion effect even when the predetermined timing comes after the pseudo continuous effect is started, in order to avoid the effect from being complicated.

  After starting the timing suggestion effect in the process of step 100AKS207, the effect control CPU 120 starts measuring the time by the suggestion effect timer 100AK002 shown in FIG. 10-2(b) (step 100AKS208). The suggestion effect timer 100AK002 is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and measures the time elapsed since the timing suggestion effect was started. The effect control CPU 120 starts counting the number of times of variable display of the first special drawing or the second special drawing executed after the effect start condition is satisfied (step 100AKS209). The effect control CPU 120 starts measuring the time by the condition determination timer 100AK003 shown in FIG. 10-2 (b) (step 100AKS210). As shown in FIG. 10-2(b), the condition determination timer 100AK003 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, and measures the period during which the game is executed after the effect start condition is satisfied. The timer value of the condition determination timer 100AK003 is updated only while the game is being executed. Specifically, the timer value of the condition determination timer 100AK003 may be updated, for example, until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the discharged game ball is detected by the discharge port switch 70. . The effect control CPU 120 starts counting the number of game balls shot after the effect start condition is satisfied (step 100AKS211).

  In the process of step 100AKS205, when it is determined that the effect start condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS205; No), whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. It is determined whether or not (step 100AKS212). When it is determined that the first variation start command or the second variation start command has not been received (step 100AKS212; No), the setting suggestion effect start processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation start command or the second variation start command has been received (step 100AKS212; Yes), the start determination timer 100AK001 is reset (step 100AKS213), and the setting suggestion effect start process ends. To do. That is, it is determined that the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed based on the determination that the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command has been received (step 100AKS212; Yes). In this case, it is determined that the slump state has ended, and the start determination timer 100AK001 that measures the duration of the slump state is reset. When the start determination timer 100AK001 is reset in the process of step 100AKS213, the customer waiting demo flag and the launch detection flag are cleared.

  FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step 100AKS 102 of FIG. 10A as the setting suggestion effect execution process. In the setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 10D, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the timing suggestion effect execution flag is ON to determine whether or not the timing suggestion effect is being executed. Is determined (step 100AKS301). When it is determined that the timing suggestion effect is not being executed (step 100AKS301; No), the setting suggestion effect execution process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing suggestion effect is being executed (step 100AKS301; Yes), it is determined whether the first condition fulfillment flag indicating that the first condition has been fulfilled is on. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the first condition is satisfied (step 100AKS302). When it is determined that the first condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS302; No), whether or not the first condition is satisfied (variation of the first special map or the second special map after the performance start condition is satisfied) It is determined whether or not the number of times of display has reached the reference number of times or more) (step 100AKS303). When it is determined that the first condition is satisfied (step 100AKS303; Yes), the effect set as the first stage effect in the effect pattern determined by the process of step 100AKS206 of the effects A to E is selected. It starts (step 100AKS304), and ends the setting suggestion effect execution process. If it is determined in step 100AKS303 that the first condition is satisfied, the first condition satisfaction flag is set to the ON state. Further, when starting the first stage effect in the process of step 100AKS304, the first suggestion effect is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS303; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred, based on the variable display result notification command received from the main board 11. (Step 100AKS305). When it is determined that no big hit has occurred (step 100AKS305; No), it is determined whether or not a predetermined ending condition is satisfied (step 100AKS306). In the present embodiment, the end condition is that the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received after the timing suggestion effect is started, and thereafter, the launch of the game ball is not detected (the launch detection command is received from the main board 11). That is, a predetermined third reference time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses. This end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not being executed. Note that the ending condition is not limited to this, and may be any condition capable of determining that the game is not being executed. The elapsed time after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command may be acquired based on the timer value of the suggestion effect timer 100AK002.

  When it is determined that the ending condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS306; No), the setting suggestion effect execution process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending condition is satisfied (step 100AKS306; Yes) or when the jackpot is generated (step 100AKS305; Yes), the first stage effect, the second stage effect and the third stage The first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect are ended without executing the stage effect (step 100AKS307), and the setting suggestion effect execution process is ended. When the timing suggestion production is ended in the process of step 100AKS307, the customer waiting demo flag, the launch detection flag and the timing suggestion production execution flag are cleared, and the start determination timer 100AK001, the suggestion production timer 100AK002 and the condition determination timer 100AK003 are reset. At the same time, the count of the number of variable displays started in the process of step 100AKS209 and the count of the number of firing balls started in the process of step 100AKS211 are reset.

  When it is determined in the process of step 100AKS302 that the first condition has been satisfied (step 100AKS302; Yes), whether or not the second condition satisfaction flag indicating that the second condition has been satisfied is on. By determining, it is determined whether the second condition has been satisfied (step 100AKS308). When it is determined that the second condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS308; No), based on the timer value of the condition determination timer 100AK003, it is determined whether or not the second condition is satisfied (the game after the effect start condition is satisfied. (Whether the period in which is executed is equal to or longer than the second reference time) is determined (step 100AKS310). The period during which the game is executed after the effect start condition is satisfied may be acquired as the timer value of the condition determination timer 100AK003. When it is determined that the second condition is satisfied (step 100AKS310; Yes), the effect set as the second stage effect in the effect pattern determined by the process of step 100AKS206 of effect A to effect E is selected. It starts (step 100AKS309) and ends the setting suggestion effect execution process. When it is determined in step 100AKS310 that the second condition is satisfied (step 100AKS310; Yes), the second condition satisfaction flag is set to the ON state. Further, when starting the second stage effect in the process of step 100AKS309, the second suggestion effect is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS310; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred, based on the variable display result notification command received from the main board 11. (Step 100AKS311). When it is determined that the big hit has not occurred (step 100AKS311; No), it is determined whether the ending condition is satisfied (step 100AKS312). When it is determined that the ending condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS312; No), the setting suggestion effect execution process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending condition is satisfied (step 100AKS312; Yes) or when a big hit is generated (step 100AKS311; Yes), the second stage effect and the third stage effect are executed. Without doing so, the second suggestion effect and the third suggestion effect are ended (step 100AKS313), and the setting suggestion effect execution process is ended. When the timing suggestion effect is finished in the process of step 100AKS313, when the timing suggestion effect is finished in the process of step 100AKS313, the first stage effect started in the process of step 100AKS304 is finished. Furthermore, the customer waiting demo flag, the launch detection flag, the timing suggestion production execution flag and the first condition satisfaction flag are cleared, and the start determination timer 100AK001, the suggestion production timer 100AK002 and the condition determination timer 100AK003 are reset, and at the process of step 100AKS209. The count of the number of variable displays started and the count of the number of shot balls started in the process of step 100AKS211 are reset.

  When it is determined that the second condition is satisfied in the process of step 100AKS308 (step 100AKS308; Yes), it is determined whether or not the third condition is satisfied (the number of shot balls after the effect start condition is satisfied is a reference). It is determined whether or not the number is equal to or more than the number (step 100AKS314). When it is determined that the third condition is satisfied (step 100AKS314; Yes), the effect set as the third stage effect in the effect pattern determined in the process of step 100AKS206 of effect A to effect E ( The third stage effect) is started (step 100AKS315). In addition, the third stage effect started in the process of step 100AKS315 is ended after being executed for a predetermined effect time. The execution time of the third stage effect may be acquired based on the timer value of the suggestion effect timer 100AK002. When ending the third stage effect, the first stage effect started in the process of step 100AKS304 and the second stage effect started in the process of step 100AKS309 are ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the third condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS314; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred, based on the variable display result notification command received from the main board 11. (Step 100AKS316). When it is determined that the big hit has not occurred (step 100AKS316; No), it is determined whether or not the ending condition is satisfied (step 100AKS317). When it is determined that the ending condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS317; No), the setting suggestion effect execution process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending condition is satisfied (step 100AKS317; Yes), when it is determined that a big hit has occurred (step 100AKS316; Yes), or when the third stage effect is started by the process of step 100AKS315. The third suggestion effect is ended (step 100AKS318), and the setting suggestion effect execution process is ended. That is, when it is determined in the process of step 100AKS317 that the ending condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that the big hit occurs in the process of step 100AKS316, the setting suggestion effect execution process is executed without executing the third stage effect. To finish. When the timing suggestion production is ended in the process of step 100AKS318, the customer waiting demo flag, the launch detection flag, the timing suggestion production execution flag, the first condition fulfillment flag and the second condition fulfillment flag are cleared, and the start determination timer 100AK001. The suggestion effect timer 100AK002 and the condition determination timer 100AK003 are reset, and the count of the number of variable displays started in the process of step 100AKS209 and the count of the number of shot balls started in the process of step 100AKS211 are reset.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, after the timing suggesting effect is started, when it is determined in the processing of step 100AKS306, 100AKS312 or 100AKS317 that the ending condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not being executed, Ends the timing suggestion effect without executing the effect which has not been executed yet among the first stage effect, the second stage effect and the third stage effect. According to this configuration, when the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the ending condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not being executed, and the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect The timing suggestion production is ended without executing the production which has not been executed yet. Therefore, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the other player recognizes the set value by the setting suggestion effect executed based on the game being performed by the one player. It is possible to prevent this from happening and keep the game fair.

  In the case where the setting suggestion effect is to be executed at the timing when the elapsed period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time period regardless of whether the game is being executed after the effect start condition is satisfied, the timing suggestion effect is Although the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received after the start, when the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect comes before the end condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the end condition is described as being satisfied based on the fact that the game is not being executed, but the end condition may be satisfied based on an operation by the player. For example, after the timing suggesting effect is started, the operation means for accepting (detecting) the operation by the player such as the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, the direction instruction key, etc. is predetermined by the player. When the operation is accepted, it is determined that the end condition is satisfied, and the timing suggestion production is ended without executing the production that has not yet been executed among the first stage production, the second stage production, and the third stage production. To do. Specifically, when the push button 31B and the push sensor 35B detect a pressing operation by the player, a reception screen for receiving the selection by the player as to whether or not to end the setting suggestion effect is displayed. When the player uses the stick controller 31A, the controller sensor unit 35A, or the direction instruction key to instruct the end of the setting suggestion effect in the displayed state, it may be determined that the end condition is satisfied. According to this configuration, when the player finishes the game and performs a predetermined operation when leaving the seat, the ending condition is satisfied, and the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect are still executed. The timing suggestion effect is ended without executing the effect that has not been performed. Therefore, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the other player recognizes the set value by the setting suggestion effect executed based on the game being performed by the one player. It is possible to prevent this from happening and keep the game fair. It should be noted that the ending condition may be satisfied based on at least one of the fact that the game is not executed and the operation by the player.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing suggesting effect is terminated when it is determined that a big hit has occurred in the process of step 100AKS305, 100AKS311 or 100AKS317 after the timing suggesting effect is started. Even when it is determined that a big hit has occurred, the timing suggesting effect may not be ended.

  Next, an example of the effect operation in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-5 is a diagram showing an example of a production operation of a setting suggestion effect and a timing suggestion effect in the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 10-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the pattern X shown in FIG. 10-3(b). FIG. 10-5(A) shows a state in which the demo screen corresponding to the stop of the game in the customer waiting state is displayed on the image display device 5 (the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed) in the slump state. ing.

  When the production start condition is satisfied (when the duration of the slump state is equal to or longer than the first reference time), as shown in FIG. The suggestive effect and the third suggestive effect are started. Specifically, as the first suggestion effect, "small announcement in 20 more games!" that indicates the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure executed by the timing when the first stage effect is executed. The effect of displaying the first message image AK1 indicating the message on the image display device 5 is started. Here, "small announcement" in the message indicates execution of the first stage effect. Further, as a second suggestion effect, a second message image AK2 representing a message “Middle announcement at 15:00 minutes left!” that indicates a period in which the game is executed until the timing at which the second stage effect is executed is imaged. The effect displayed on the display device 5 is started. Here, “middle announcement” in the message indicates execution of the second stage effect. Further, as the third suggestive effect, a third message image AK3 indicating a message “Large announcement with 2000 more shots!” indicating the number of shot balls until the timing when the third stage effect is executed is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect to be displayed is started. After the timing suggestion effect is started, the display of the number of times of variable display in the first message image AK1, the display of the period during which the game is being executed in the second message image AK2, and the firing ball in the third message image AK3 The display of the number is updated according to the progress of the game, as shown in FIGS. 10-5(B) to 10-5(E). FIGS. 10-5(B) and 10-5(C) show a state in which the first suggestive effect, the second suggestive effect, and the third suggestive effect are executed during the same period.

  After that, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 10-5(C), each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L of "left", "middle", and "right" of the image display device 5 is displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in 5C and 5R.

  When the first condition is satisfied (when the number of times of variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram after the production start condition is satisfied is equal to or greater than the reference number), FIG. 10-5(D) is displayed. As shown, the display of the first message image AK1 as the first suggestive effect is terminated, and as the first-stage effect, the fourth message image AK4 representing the message “Is the setting not bad?” is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect to be displayed (effect A shown in FIG. 10-3(a)) is started. FIG. 10-5(D) shows a state in which the second suggestive effect and the third suggestive effect are executed during the same period.

  When the second condition is satisfied (when the period in which the game is executed after the performance start condition is satisfied is the second reference time or longer), as shown in FIG. The display of the second message image AK2 as the suggestive effect is terminated, and as the second-stage effect, the fifth message image AK5 representing the message “Setting is not bad!” is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). -3 (a) The effect B) shown in (a) is started. FIG. 10-5(E) shows a state in which the first stage effect and the second stage effect are executed during the same period.

  When the third condition is satisfied (when the number of shot balls after the satisfaction of the effect start condition is equal to or greater than the reference number), as shown in FIG. 3rd message image AK3 is ended, and as the third stage effect, a sixth message image AK6 representing the message “It's the best setting!” is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-3(a)). The effect X) shown in is executed. FIG. 10-5(F) shows a state in which the first stage effect, the second stage effect and the third stage effect are executed during the same period. After the third stage effect is executed for a predetermined effect time, as shown in FIG. 10-5(G), the display of the fourth message image AK4 as the first stage effect and the fifth message as the second stage effect. The setting suggestion effect is ended by ending the display of the image AK5 and the display of the sixth message image AK6 as the third stage effect.

  It should be noted that an effect other than the timing suggestive effect may be executed as an effect that suggests the timing at which the setting suggestive effect is executed before the setting suggestive effect is executed. For example, as an effect that suggests the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed before the setting suggestion effect is executed, an explanation effect that explains (indicates) the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed to the player is executed. Good. Specifically, at the end of the special drawing game in which the display result is “big hit”, the effect of displaying the character image suggesting the set value on the image display device 5 is executed as the setting suggesting effect, and the explanation effect is performed. As an example, an effect for explaining to the player that the execution timing of the setting suggesting effect is at the end of the special figure game in which the display result is "big hit" (for example, "note the character image displayed at the end of the big hit!"). The effect of displaying an image representing the message on the image display device 5) may be executed. The explanation effect may be executed at any timing before the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 100AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 100AK, conventionally, the setting values of a plurality of stages are changed based on the operation, the jackpot probability is set to a value corresponding to the changed setting value, and the giraffe and elephant are set according to the setting values before and after the change. As a game machine that displays a character image of one of the lions to suggest a setting value before and after the change, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, it is desired to improve the interest of the game. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 100AK for providing a gaming machine with an increased interest in gaming,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game and controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of steps 100AKS304, 100AKS309, 100AKS315, etc.),
Special effect execution means (for example, step 100AKS206 of step 100AKS206) that executes a special effect (for example, timing suggestion effect, explanation effect, etc.) that suggests the timing at which the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means before the specific effect is executed. CPU120 for effect control which executes processing),
With
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved and the operating rate of the game machine can be improved. it can.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic part 100AK,
The special effect execution means can execute the special effect in any of a plurality of kinds of effect modes (for example, timing suggestive effect, an effect mode in which a first condition is suggested, and an effect mode in which a second condition is suggested). And a performance mode that suggests the third condition).
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 100AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute special effects in various effect modes, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic part 100AK,
The special effect execution unit executes, as the special effect, an effect that suggests a period until the timing when the specific effect is executed (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206, the second-stage effect is a second-stage effect). Start production that suggests the period until the timing of execution),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or 2 relating to the characteristic part 100AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved and the operating rate of the game machine can be improved. it can.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic part 100AK,
As the special effect, the special effect execution means executes an effect that suggests the number of times of variable display executed by the timing when the specific effect is executed (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206, as a first suggestive effect). , The effect that suggests the number of variable displays executed by the timing when the first stage effect is executed is started),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic part 100AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved and the operating rate of the game machine can be improved. it can.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 100AK,
After the predetermined timing after the game is started, the special effect executing means executes the special effect at a higher rate than before the predetermined timing (for example, the predetermined timing after the game is started). After that, the rate of determining to execute the timing suggesting effect is higher than before the predetermined timing),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic part 100AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 relating to the characteristic part 100AK,
The special effect execution means can execute at least a first special effect that suggests a first condition and a second special effect that suggests a second condition as the special effect (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206). , A first suggestive effect that suggests the first condition, a second suggestive effect that suggests the second condition, and a third suggestive effect that suggests the third condition are started),
The specific effect execution means,
It is possible to execute the specific effect in response to the satisfaction of the first condition after the execution of the first special effect (for example, execute the process of step 100AKS304),
It is possible to execute the specific effect in response to the second condition being satisfied after the second special effect has been executed (for example, the processing of step 100AKS309 is executed),
The first special effect and the second special effect can be executed during the same period (for example, the second suggestive effect is executed during the period in which the first suggestive effect is being executed),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 5 relating to the characteristic part 100AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect stepwise, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 7 relating to the characteristic part 100AK,
The special effect execution means starts the special effect in response to the establishment of a specific condition (for example, effect start condition) in a state where the variable display is not executed (for example, effect start condition in the process of step 100AKS205). If it is determined that the above condition is satisfied, the process of step 100AKS207 is executed),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 6 relating to the characteristic part 100AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 8 relating to the characteristic part 100AK,
After the special effect is started, if a predetermined condition (for example, an ending condition or the like) is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not being executed, the special effect is ended without executing the specific effect ( For example, when it is determined that the ending condition is satisfied in the processing of steps 100AKS306, 100AKS312, and 100AKS317, the processing of steps 100AKS307, 100AKS313, and 100AKS318 is executed),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 7 relating to the characteristic part 100AK.
According to such a configuration, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the other player sets the set value by the specific effect executed based on the game being performed by the one player. It is possible to prevent the recognition of, and to maintain the fairness of the game.

As a gaming machine of the means 9 relating to the characteristic part 100AK,
Operation means (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, a direction instruction key, etc.) for accepting an operation by a player is further provided,
After the special effect is started, when a predetermined operation by the player is accepted by the operation means, the special effect is ended without executing the specific effect (for example, after the timing suggestion effect is started. , The stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, the direction instruction key, etc., when the player receives a predetermined operation, the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. End the timing suggestion effect without executing the effect that has not been executed yet),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 8 relating to the characteristic part 100AK.
According to such a configuration, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the other player sets the set value by the specific effect executed based on the game being performed by the one player. It is possible to prevent the recognition of, and to maintain the fairness of the game.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 101AK)
Regarding the characteristic part 101AK, conventionally, the setting values of a plurality of stages are changed based on the operation, the jackpot probability is set to a value corresponding to the changed setting value, and the giraffe, elephant, and lion are set according to the setting values before and after the change. An example of a game machine which displays one of the character images to suggest the setting value before and after the change is described in, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is desired to improve the interest of the game. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic unit 101AK for providing a gaming machine with an increased interest in gaming,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is capable of playing a game and controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state)
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of steps 100AKS304, 100AKS309, 100AKS315, etc.),
Special effect execution means (for example, step 100AKS206 of step 100AKS206) that executes a special effect (for example, timing suggestion effect, explanation effect, etc.) that suggests the timing at which the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means before the specific effect is executed. CPU120 for effect control which executes processing),
Equipped with
The special effect execution means can execute the special effect in any of a plurality of kinds of effect modes (for example, timing suggestive effect, an effect mode in which a first condition is suggested, and an effect mode in which a second condition is suggested). And a performance mode that suggests the third condition).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, and the special effect is executed in various effect modes to improve the interest of the game. It is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 101AK,
The special effect execution unit executes, as the special effect, an effect that suggests a period until the timing when the specific effect is executed (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206, a second-stage effect is a second-stage effect). Start production that suggests the period until the timing of execution),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 101AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved and the operating rate of the game machine can be improved. it can.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic part 101AK,
As the special effect, the special effect execution means executes an effect that suggests the number of times of variable display executed by the timing when the specific effect is executed (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206, as a first suggestive effect). , The effect that suggests the number of variable displays executed by the timing when the first stage effect is executed is started),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or 2 relating to the characteristic part 101AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved and the operating rate of the game machine can be improved. it can.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic part 101AK,
After the predetermined timing after the game is started, the special effect executing means executes the special effect at a higher rate than before the predetermined timing (for example, the predetermined timing after the game is started). After that, the rate of determining to execute the timing suggestive effect is higher than before the predetermined timing),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic part 101AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic unit 101AK,
The special effect execution means can execute at least a first special effect that suggests a first condition and a second special effect that suggests a second condition as the special effect (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206). , A first suggestive effect that suggests the first condition, a second suggestive effect that suggests the second condition, and a third suggestive effect that suggests the third condition are started),
The specific effect execution means,
It is possible to execute the specific effect in response to the satisfaction of the first condition after the execution of the first special effect (for example, execute the processing of step 100AKS304),
It is possible to execute the specific effect in response to the second condition being satisfied after the second special effect has been executed (for example, the processing of step 100AKS309 is executed),
The first special effect and the second special effect can be executed during the same period (for example, the second suggestive effect is executed during the period in which the first suggestive effect is being executed),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic part 101AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect stepwise, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 related to the characteristic part 101AK,
The special effect execution means starts the special effect in response to the establishment of a specific condition (for example, effect start condition) in a state where the variable display is not executed (for example, effect start condition in the process of step 100AKS205). If it is determined that the above condition is satisfied, the process of step 100AKS207 is executed),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 5 relating to the characteristic part 101AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 7 related to the characteristic part 101AK,
After the special effect is started, if a predetermined condition (for example, an end condition or the like) is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not being executed, the special effect is ended without executing the specific effect ( For example, when it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied in the processing of steps 100AKS306, 100AKS312, and 100AKS317, the processing of steps 100AKS307, 100AKS313, and 100AKS318 is executed),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 6 relating to the characteristic part 101AK.
According to such a configuration, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the other player sets the set value by the specific effect executed based on the game being performed by the one player. It is possible to prevent the recognition of, and to maintain the fairness of the game.

As a gaming machine of the means 8 related to the characteristic part 101AK,
An operating means (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, a direction instruction key, etc.) for receiving an operation by a player is further provided.
After the special effect is started, when a predetermined operation by the player is accepted by the operation means, the special effect is ended without executing the specific effect (for example, after the timing suggestion effect is started. , The stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, the direction instruction key, etc., when a predetermined operation by the player is accepted, the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. End the timing suggestion effect without executing the effect that has not been executed yet),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 7 relating to the characteristic part 101AK.
According to such a configuration, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the other player sets the set value by the specific effect executed based on the game being performed by the one player. It is possible to prevent the recognition of, and to maintain the fairness of the game.

(Explanation of means common to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, 101AK)
As a gaming machine of means A relating to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, 101AK,
Setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to setting,
An initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to the initialization of the gaming machine,
Setting confirmation control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state based on the detection of the operation by the setting detection means upon the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 executing steps AKS001, AKS002, etc.),
A change permission control means capable of controlling the change permission state based on the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means upon the start of power supply (for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps Sa6 and Sa13),
The gaming machines according to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the setting confirmation state and the change permission state and appropriately set the setting value.

As a gaming machine of the means B relating to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, 101AK,
Setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to setting,
Initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization,
When an operation is not detected by the setting detecting means and an operation is detected by the initialization detecting means upon the start of the power supply, the initialization notification is executed together with the start of the power supply while the power supply is started. When an operation is detected by the setting detection means, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification after the operation is no longer detected (for example, for effect control for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012) CPU 120, etc.),
The gaming machines according to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the initialization notification and appropriately set the set value.

As a gaming machine of means C relating to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, 101AK,
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 29 or the like) capable of displaying information regarding a game value given based on the game medium entering a predetermined area,
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A),
The gaming machines according to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be used.
In such a configuration, the setting value can be appropriately set without separately providing a configuration for displaying the setting value.

As a gaming machine of means D relating to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, 101AK,
Production detecting means capable of detecting an operation relating to the output amount of the production (for example, output amount changeover switch 71AK001, etc.),
Display control means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control that executes step AKS026) that displays the display of the set value by the setting means in preference to the display of the output amount of the effect,
The gaming machines according to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be used.
In such a configuration, the display regarding the set value is appropriately performed, and it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means E relating to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, 101AK,
Production control means for controlling execution of production based on information from the game control means (for example, production control CPU 120 for executing command analysis processing of AKS015, etc.),
In the change permission state, the effect control means limits the control based on information different from the notification information for notifying the end of the change permission state. For example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing AKS027. ) And
The gaming machines according to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring and set the setting value appropriately.

(Explanation regarding the association of the characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic parts 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic part. The feature parts combined in this way or the individual feature parts that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to other feature parts. For example, regarding the characteristic part 71AK, the configuration of the production control CPU 120 that executes the start-time output switching process in step 71AKS013 of the effect control main process, and regarding the characteristic part 72AK, the short initial operation is performed in step 72AK007 of the power-on command process. Regarding the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that performs control to be executed and the characteristic portion 73AK, control for performing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 of the power-on command processing that the setting change is to be ended. Regarding the configuration of the CPU 120 and the characteristic portion 74AK, the setting control is executed in step 75AKS008 of the power-on command processing regarding the configuration of the CPU 120 for effect control and the characteristic portion 75AK which executes the confirmation effect control processing in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main processing. Regarding the configuration of the production control CPU 120 that executes the confirmation production control process and the characteristic parts 100AK and 101AK, the setting suggestion production start process is executed in step 100AKS101 of the production control process process, and the setting suggestion production execution process is executed in step 100AKS102. The configuration may be a combination of some or all of them.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example and the configurations shown in the later-described exemplary embodiment and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

  In addition, it should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

  In addition, as the gaming machine of the present invention, a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 including the characteristic portion 12AK) and executing a specific effect (for example, a next notice) Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) and a first effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing the first effect (for example, active notice) before the specific effect. And a second effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect before the specific effect, and the first effect. And a third effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a third effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) different from the effect and the second effect. The execution rate is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed without executing the first effect (for example, FIG. 8). -9), the time when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed is the same as the time when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (for example, FIG. 8-9), and can execute a suggestive effect (eg, reach effect) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, big hit game state) advantageous to the player and suggest that the advantageous state is controlled. A possible suggestive effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) and a title informing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of informing a title corresponding to the suggestive effect are provided, and the title notifying means is the instructive effect. It is possible to inform the title corresponding to the suggestive effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of (for example, a portion that displays the title of the reach effect as shown in FIG. 11-2(D) or FIG. 11-2(F). ), the suggestive effect execution means includes at least a first suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 11-2 (H)). As shown in, a portion for displaying the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the super reach D) gaming machine.

  With such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved. Further, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of a game machine that enhances the interest of the game and also improves the effect of the game, a game machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a pachinko game machine). In 1), a suggestion production execution means (for example, CPU 120 for production control) capable of executing suggestion production (for example, reach production) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, and a title corresponding to the suggestion production. A title notification unit capable of notifying (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) is provided, and the title notifying unit can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, 11-2(D) and FIG. 11-2(F), the portion for displaying the title of the reach effect), the suggestive effect execution means, as the suggestive effect, at least a first suggestive effect (for example, super reach A). Or a reach effect of super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) can be executed, and the title notifying unit is the second suggestion effect in the second suggestion effect. The title corresponding to the second suggestion effect is notified from the start of the effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (H), the reach effect of the super reach D is responded to from the start of the reach effect of the super reach D. The portion that displays the title 31AK007 that has been played) is a gaming machine. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, the characteristic portion of another embodiment will be described. Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-1 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and reach types in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 11-1(A), in the present embodiment, the variable patterns PA1-1 and PA1 of non-reach loss that the display result is “miss” without the variable display mode of the decorative pattern being the reach mode. -2, the variable display mode of the decorative design is the reach mode and the display result is "miss". The reach change pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., the display result is "big hit". The fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-1(B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is, as shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 11-1B, normal reach<super reach E<super reach D<super reach C<super reach. Reach B <super reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where the development effect of developing (promoting) to reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like illustrated in FIG. 11-1A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 11-1(A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to a level one level higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more levels is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 11-1(B), the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super-reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated, and the effect of production is improved. It should be noted that the notification mode of the title may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title characters (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of performance operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. 11-2 and 11-3 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 11-2(A) shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the decorative pattern showing the number 7 on “left” and “right” is stopped, and the reach mode is set. After that, the effect branches according to the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11-2(C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach production is started, such as when the introduction part of the reach production of super reach (also referred to as super reach production) is finished, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the characters "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach (here "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is announced. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. 11-2(E). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach A that is confronted with is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

  Note that when the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the speaker 8 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. The dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 11-2(E), and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11-2(C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect such as the introduction of the super reach effect, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. (Here, the characters “SP reach B”) are displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of super reach B is displayed. Be informed. After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, the character 31AK006 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. 11-2(G). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach B which is confronted with is executed.

  In this way, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect and the like, so the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  In addition, super reach A (FIG. 11-2(C)→(D)→(E)...) and super reach B(FIG. 11-2(C)→(F)→(G)...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 11-2(C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach will be performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title will be notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to completely commoning the presentation mode until the title is informed, and it is possible to determine which super-reach will be achieved by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You can By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 11-2(H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy"), thereby notifying the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 11-2(H). Here, the expectation is the expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to be exactly the same as the reach's big hit reliability.

  It should be noted that the notification of the voice of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-2(I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. In addition, in FIG. 11-2(I), the effect contents common to FIG. 11-2(C) (super reach A, super reach B) are shown, but the super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. You may.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 11-2(J), the character 31AK009 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Executed.

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other. Executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation by notifying the title without stopping the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach productions of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped to notify the title (FIGS. 11-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, in the super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of super reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the reach effect of super-reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped and the title may be notified.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach that have a low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of a reach with low jackpot reliability, The title may be announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. The title is announced on a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a smaller display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be changed as in this embodiment, or the display place may be changed.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D, which has a lower jackpot reliability than super-reach A and super-reach B, is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level indication is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, you may make it display an expectation degree suggestion display in at least one part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the expectation indication is not limited to that shown by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 11-2(H), and the expectation may be indicated by a meter or gauge, or the expectation may be indicated. You may make it display the numerical value corresponding to. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2(H) and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, half the number (half) of black stars can be displayed, and the number of stages of expectation may be increased. .

(Timing display end timing)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determination effect described later is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be recognized even during super reach production. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing because the effect of the presentation can be improved.

  Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each of the reach effects has been executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-3(B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 11-3(C), an image 31AK013 showing that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 11-3(D), A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is “miss”, an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is finished before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharpness.

  In the production operation example shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, during the reach production of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced and the variable display is executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5. The display of the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  When displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, or a display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, it is not displayed as appropriate during the reach effect of super reach in order to draw attention to the reach effect. May be At that time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting too much due to the low-reliability reach effect, and to focus on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. After that, in the case of developing into the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11-4(C), the title of the super reach A is notified and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. In the case of development into super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11-4(D), the title of super reach B is announced and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11D, when the reach of the development destination is the reach that performs the title notification by the display and the sound, the title notification by the display and the sound is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11-4(B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display indicating that a failure has occurred). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a developmental development effect such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the example of the production operation shown in FIG. 11-2(H), the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display a black star indicating the expectation from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, It is also possible to execute the expectation suggesting effect in which the expectation is suggested by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 11-5(A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectation degree indications 31AK021 are first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-5(B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 11-5(C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 11-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation indication 31AK021, the black star is highlighted such as shining, as shown in FIG. 11-5(F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11-5(A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation suggestive production is diversified, and the production effect is improved. In addition, the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation increasing at one time, and it fits into the white star of the degree of expectation indication, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation increasing You may make it perform the effect like.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 11-5(G) to (L) are example production operations of title notification and expectation suggestion production in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production modes. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 11-5(A) to 11(F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of super reach D is the reach effect of super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-5(G). At this time, a voice corresponding to the reach title name is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, voice having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-5(H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 11-5(I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "Pong" indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 11-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, such as shining, as shown in FIG. 11-5(L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game status, etc., the title notification mode is made different, and the effect is diversified. improves.

  FIG. 11-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation level) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive effects) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, the effect according to the player's preference can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an expectation suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggesting effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the black star is completed, as shown in FIG. 11-6(B), the image display is performed. The development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 11-6(C), the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters "SP reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that, after the movable body 32 has operated, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Advance notice)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7(A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. After the notification, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 11-7(B). As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 11-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

  In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, a sound according to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the notice effect or the development effect in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to the big hit advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. In the notice production determination process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is the variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-9A, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in Fig. 11-9(A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", or "black" to "fruit pattern". There are those that change, and those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies according to the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

  Note that the "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold and the characters themselves are "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". . There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined. Then, in the case of super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of super-reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as effect modes, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-9(A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 11-9(B) in the special mode. The title display color is determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of the display color) of the title notice depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In the present embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the display mode of the dialogue of the character in the reach production of the super reach (for example, the display color of the dialogue).

  After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-9C, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in Fig. 11-9(C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is "white", "red", and the ones that change from "white" to "red" are provided. ), the jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the production is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is achieved. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timings of changing the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to focus attention on the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that instead of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the notice production, a plurality of change timings of the production mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence/absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results of 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of the super reach, but the title notice can be executed in the case of the specific super reach (for example, except the super reach with low reliability). Alternatively, at least one of the speech announcements may be executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 11-9, but the determination rate is arbitrary, and for example, the determination rate may be different depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice presentation with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence/absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialog notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may differ, or the title effect may change. The ratio of which presentation mode changes (the ratio of which effect) may be different from that of the serif notice, or the number of colors (how many stages) to change may be different. .. By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue is applied when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence/absence of execution of effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect according to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

  As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed to the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the notification of the title, like the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the title is notified on the image display device 5. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification related to other effects (mainly to notify characters). May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 as the notice effect (for example, the look-ahead notice effect), the transition zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“reach with 7”, “use the stick controller to annihilate the enemy”, etc.) and perform a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to notification of a mission title.

(Modification 31AK-1 of Characteristic Section 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( Fig. 11-3(B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win/loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

  FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 are diagrams showing a production operation example of super reach in the modification 31AK-1 in which an operation production is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 11-10(A), after the reach mode is set on the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B), a character 31AK041 which is a teammate character and a character which is an enemy character. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 11-10(C) to (F) and FIGS. 11-11(G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 11-10(C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode with higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 11-10(E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the pleased character 31AK046 and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 11-11(H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 11-11(I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect has been executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

  After that, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is deleted as shown in FIG. 11-11(J), and the stick image 31AK051 is displayed at the central portion as shown in FIG. 11-11(K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 11-11(L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. When no operation is detected within a predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in Fig. 11-11(L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification 31AK-1, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect images, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The jackpot reliability when hit is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect effect is improved and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  11-10 and 11-11, although the reach title notification and expectation degree suggestion display are omitted, the reach effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11 is omitted. Alternatively, it may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation production. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 11-8.

(Modification 31AK-2 of Characteristic Section 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, the specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 that form the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output from the speaker 8 and the game effect lamp 9 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 11-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 11-12(a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the shutter which has been closed is opened, variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 11-12(b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set as shown in FIG. 11-12(c).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12(d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters “battle reach” indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

  Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot", which indicates that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, the player can easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Note that the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, but the output periods may be partially overlapped.

  Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 11-12(e) is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the variable display screen based on the original numerical design is returned. As shown in FIG. 11-12(f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-12 (a) and (d), all of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 11-12(a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 11-12(d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 11-12(a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 11-12(d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence or absence of the shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 11-8. At that time, the shutter effect may be determined based on the result of determining the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 11-8. For example, when the title display color is determined to be a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the decision regarding the reach title effect may be executed together with the decision regarding the shutter effect in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 11-8.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. As shown in FIGS. 12-1 and 12-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board (gauge that constitutes a gaming board surface. Board 2 and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, in the gaming machine frame 207SG003, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is provided between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003. The glass door frame 207SG003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) to unlock it, and a player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 207SG002L in which game balls can flow down, The right side of the image display device 5 in 2 is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the game balls can flow down.

  The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a relatively weakly launched (left hit) game ball flows down by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by operation of the hit ball operation handle 30. A game ball that is more strongly launched (right-handed) than a game ball that flows down is a game area that flows down through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5.

  In addition, the general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R, the passage gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, the general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can be won at the first start winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. The second start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 can be won, and the passage gate 41 can be passed.

  As shown in FIG. 12-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot enter the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot enter the first starting winning opening. Is becoming

  As shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-7, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in the board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. The state is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value state, and a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) etc. which will be described later in the set value changed state. A setting switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value and an opening sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. As will be described later in detail, the setting value change state in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a store clerk or the like of a game hall can confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ) Is also.

  The setting switching main body portion provided with an operating unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052, is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the locking switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052 are included. Is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

  Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. By using the game machine frame 207SG003 to open, it becomes possible to operate. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch that can execute an ON/OFF switching operation, which will be described later, with a setting key. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined with one key.

  Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged above the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged on the front surface of the board case 207SG201 when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. It is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1 and FIG. 12-2, at a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of performing variable display of 1 special map, second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of performing variable display of second special symbol, first hold display capable of displaying first reserved memory number 207SG025A, a second holding display 207SG025B capable of displaying the second number of reserved storages, a normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing a variable display of the ordinary symbols, a general figure holding display 207SG025C capable of displaying the number of ordinary figure holdings, In a gaming state in which a round indicator 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds of the big hitting game (big hitting type) during a big hitting game, a high basing state (time saving state), a big hitting game state, or the like, is launched toward the right gaming area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 207SG133 that lights up in a probability variation state, and a time saving lamp 207SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) are collectively arranged.

  As shown in FIGS. 12-3 and 12-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8 segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed with a common combination. ing.

  In the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is a variable display with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Results and derivation display are possible.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is different from the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, although the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different. At least a part of the jackpot pattern that can be derived and displayed and the jackpot pattern that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be overlapped.

  As shown in FIG. 12-5, each of the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B has LEDs of four segments arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, if the number of reserved memories is one, only the LED on the left end is turned on, and the second from the left each time the number of reserved memories increases, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left are sequentially turned on. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LEDs in the pending display corresponding to the variable display are moved in a predetermined shift direction (characteristics of the present embodiment) in response to the reduction (consumption) of the pending storage. In part 207SG, the light goes out toward the left).

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending storage is preferentially executed. It is like this. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-6, for example, when there is one first special figure reservation memory and two second special figure reservation memories (only the LED on the left end of the first reservation indicator 207SG025A). Is lit and the left two LEDs of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is set to 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure pending storage is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12-6, the round indicator 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the big hit type in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, there are provided a total of three big hit types: a big hit A which is a 5 round big hit, a big hit B which is a 10 round big hit, and a big hit C which is a 15 round big hit. However, which of the segments configuring the round display unit 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the type of jackpot.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

  The effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 operable between the respective origin positions and the effect positions during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and the second movable body 207SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332 that can detect this is connected.

  FIG. 12-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic unit 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 12-8(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12-8(A), the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command designating fluctuation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in, for example, FIG. 12-8(B), the determination result of whether the variable display result is “miss”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ) Or different EXT data is set according to the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) as to which of the plurality of types the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-8(B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification processing described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also called a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening to notify that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the EXT data to be set may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times the round is executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designation command which notifies that the 1st starting condition for executing the special drawing game which uses the 1st special drawing in 1st special design indicator 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start winning combination designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and activated (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting value changing state). The command E104H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the set value has ended in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the set value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the set value confirming state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information are configured.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 for temporary storage, and the CPU 103 writes temporary data to the variable data. A variable data read operation for reading out, a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. The transmission operation of outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 12-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 12-9, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type and the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the universal figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game controlling microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game controlling microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  It should be noted that although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 12-9, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random number values is used. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 12-10 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, and A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to the case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a variation display result of "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ,... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 12-10, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β are used. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed In this case, the special figure change time is set longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the change display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set to be high, and thus the normal reach change pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are classified into variation pattern types such as non-reach type, normal reach type, and super reach type. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and these fluctuations are set. It is also possible to first determine the type of the variation pattern from the random number for determining the pattern type, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-10, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, when the set value that is set is 1, it is a variation pattern that causes the normal reach loss, and when the set value is 2, pseudo continuous production is performed. If the set value that is set is 3 as a variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, a pseudo continuous production is performed 3 times and a variation pattern that becomes super-reach loss...

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 12-11 to 12-13, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 12-11(B), and FIG. -11(C) display result determination table (setting value 3), FIG. 12-12(A) display result determination table (setting value 4), FIG. 12-12(B) display result determination table ( Setting value 5), display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 12-12(C), jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 12-13(A), FIG. B) big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in, big hit variation pattern determination table, small hit variation pattern determination table, loss variation pattern determination table, public figure display result determination table (not shown), universal figure A fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is changed. . The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases gradually. In other words, the set value is the largest value of 6, which is the most unfavorable value to the amusement hall side, and the smaller the value becomes in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the more advantageous value to the amusement hall side. Become.

  12-11(A) to 12-11(C) and 12-12(A) to 12-12(C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, a display result determination table common to the first special drawing and the second special drawing is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 12-11(A) to FIG. 12-11(C) and FIG. 12-12(A) to FIG. 12-12(C), in each display result determination table, the game state is a probable state ( In the (high accuracy state), more determination values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of the "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, and setting is Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the setting value is 5, 1/200 when the setting value is 6), the special map display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, 1/120 when the setting value is 5, and 1/100 when the setting value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as compared to the normal state and the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

  In addition, in each display result determination table, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state and the set value. Has been. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-11(A) to FIG. 12-11(C) and FIG. 12-12(A) to FIG. 12-12(C), regardless of the game state and the set value, The probability that it is determined to control the small hit game state by setting the special figure display result to "small hit" is set to 1/200. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is set as “small hit” regardless of the set value and the small hit game state is controlled is the same probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining to control the small hitting game state as the “small hit” as the special figure display result may be different according to the set value.

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special map display result being "big hit" is the highest. The lower the value of the set value, the larger the value of the set value is assigned the judgment value so that the probability of being determined to control the big hit game state as "big hit" is set (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5>set value 4>set value 3>set value 2>set value 1).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 12-11(A) to 12-11(C) and FIG. 12-12. If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in (A) to FIG. 12-12 (C) is matched, it is determined that the special design is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Also, MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 12-11(A) to 12-11(C) and 12-12(A) to 12-12(C). Then, it is decided to make a small hit for the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. In addition, "probability" shown in FIGS. 12-11(A) to 12-11(C) and 12-12(A) to 12-12(C) is a probability (ratio) of being a big hit and a small hit. The probability (ratio) of Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, to determine whether to control the big hit gaming state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B stop symbols in It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, determining whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit gaming state, stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 causes the display results shown in FIGS. 12-11(A) to 12-11(C) and 12-12(A) to 12-12(C). It is designed to judge whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the judgment table.Whether a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value Whether or not to make a small hit may be individually determined.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of six setting values 1 to 6 that can be set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

  12-13(A) and 12-13(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 12-13 (A), using the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed) determines the jackpot type It is a table when doing. In addition, FIG. 12-13 (B) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

  The jackpot type determination table is, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. Is a table that is referenced to determine

  Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also called an uncertain variation big hit) that only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state and the low accuracy high base state shifts, and a big hit game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and a big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a probable variation big hit) are set so as to shift to the high-precision high-base state.

  The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to a first state that is advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time saving control executed after the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment), or a special number of times of the predetermined number of times. Before the figure game is executed, the jackpot game state is entered and the game ends.

  On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is big hit B or big hit C, high-precision control and time saving control are executed again after the big hit game state ends, so the big hit game state continues without going through the normal state. It occurs in the so-called condominium state.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example in which three types of big hit A to big hit C are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is 2. You may provide less than four types or four or more types.

  As shown in FIG. 12-13(A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), if the setting value is "1", the determination value range of MR2 is from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the setting value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “6”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, only the time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability change control and the probability variation control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the highest payout rate is the case where the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-13(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the setting value is "4", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. (The jackpot B is not assigned a judgment value).

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability variation control and the big hit control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the highest payout rate is the case where the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined as big hit B. The example that does not do, that is, that the jackpot type determination rate is different depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot type is not determined (determination rate is 0%). Although included, even when the variation special map is the second special map and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, there may be provided a case of determining the big hit type as big hit B. .

  In this way, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. It has become.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is It may be determined by using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the jackpot probability is increased, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game playability is not limited to this, and may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, if the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the probability of jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, the game ball during the big hit game, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 While the gaming state after the big hit game is finished is controlled to a probable state on the basis of passing, the game characteristic in which the ratio of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special map (so-called V If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time saving control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on passing a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the small hit probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6). ..

  Furthermore, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed to a probable state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot gaming state).

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is "big hit", and the variation display result is "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table that is used when it is determined in advance and the variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “miss” are prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

  As shown in FIGS. 12-15(A) and 12-15(B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A is used when the big hit type is big hit A. And a big hit variation pattern judgment table (big hit B, big hit C) used when the big hit types are big hit B and big hit C, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (big hit) A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C) show fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and super reach β big hits. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

  As shown in FIG. 12-15(A), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits A), when the set value is “1”, one of the ranges 1 to 997 of the judgment values of MR3 is set. Up to 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are super reach. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 1 to 380 of the range of the judgment value of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 381 to 835. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super-reach α big hit, and 836 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super-reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 360 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 361 to 820. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super-reach α big hit, and 821 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super-reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 340 of the range of MR3 determination values of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 341 to 805. Are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 320 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 321 to 790. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 791 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 300 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 301 to 775. Are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 12-15(B), in the big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the judgment value range of MR3 is from 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is "2", 1 to 180 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "3", of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 160 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 161 to 470 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 140 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 431 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits. When the set value is “5”, 1 to 120 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 390 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of super-reach α jackpot, and 391 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super-reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 100 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 101 to 350 are set. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit are assigned, and the variation patterns 351 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  In this way, when the big hit A is won in the special drawing game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. And the set values become lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special drawing game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the determination values are “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super-reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. You can increase your expectations.

  Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-15(C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the setting value is any of 1 to 6, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for small hits in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for small hits. With the set values 1 to 6, the variation pattern of small hits may be determined from a plurality of variation patterns at different rates.

  In addition, the variation pattern determination table for the loss, the variation pattern determination table A for the loss, which is used when the number of pending storage is 1 or less in the low base state where the game state is not in the time saving control, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed, are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β-miss in the range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 12-16(A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal-reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the setting value is “2”, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 431 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “3”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “4”, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, and 391 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “5”, 1 to 370 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 350 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super-reach that correspond to a total pending storage number of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 12-16(B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for low base medium total pending storage numbers 2 to 4), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal-reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the setting value is “2”, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 481 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, 1 to 460 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is "4", 1 to 440 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 420 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “6”, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, and 401 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total pending storage number of 5 to 8, a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of α-miss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super-reach β-loss (PA2-3) within a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 12-16(C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more low base medium total pending storage numbers), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) in the range of the MR3 determination values 1 to 997, and 531 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 511 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 490 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “5”, 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Also, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss ( PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super-reach β loss, in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take.

  As shown in FIG. 12-10(D), in the variation pattern determination table for loss D (for high base), when the setting value is “1”, among the determination value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. The variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) is assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the setting value is “2”, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4) in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 531 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “3”, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 511 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  When the set value is "4", 1 to 490 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  As described above, when the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D are used, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than the rate of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the rate of determining the normal reach variation pattern. Are set to be lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. When using the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 of the determination values are the super reach β loss. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by the common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the production effect from being deteriorated due to the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β loss are completely the same between the set values as variation patterns for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the determination rate of the variation pattern of these super-reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β loss is between each set value. May differ by a slight difference (for example, about 1%).

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value that has been set, but is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set. Alternatively, only the determination rate of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is lost, the super reach α The determination rate of only one of the loss variation determination rate and the super reach β loss variation determination rate may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value that is set, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value that is set.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different depending on the set value that has been set. Depending on the set value that has been set, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns of the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. That is, if the determination rate of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

  The variation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach-loss variation is less than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The variation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 12-10). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach-miss variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, and the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, by making a start winning, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start winning that is not held, and when the number of holding memories decreases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without a long shortening of the fluctuation time ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the time for the variable display becomes longer.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-16(A) to 12-16(C), fluctuations are made by using different fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss depending on the total number of pending storages. Although the form for determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first The number of special symbols pending storage, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern may be determined by using a different variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the number of pending storage numbers of the second special symbol).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value of 1 to 6, the variation pattern of the super reach loss. The ranges of random number values assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation display is actually performed in the variation pattern of the super-reach loss (variation pattern of the super-reach loss). The appearance rate) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the variation display is performed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the example is different. The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display shows the variation of the super reach loss at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed in a pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 12-2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like. Further, the data according to the control state and the data showing the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data showing the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a general figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It is provided with a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

  The 1st special figure reservation storage section, the game ball passes (enters) the 1st starting winning a prize mouth which the winning a prize ball device 6A forms, the starting winning a prize (the 1st starting winning a prize) occurs, but the special drawing which is not started yet Hold data of the game (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning number in the first start winning opening (detection order of gaming balls) with the holding number, and establishes the first starting condition in passing (entry) of the gaming ball. On the basis of the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination etc. It is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending, and the variable display result (special figure display result in this special figure game ), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not a big hit will occur.

  The second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred, but has not been started yet. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning number into the second starting winning opening (detection order of gaming balls) with the holding number, and establishes the second starting condition in passing (entry) of the gaming ball. Based on the above, the CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, and the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like, as reserved data, It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), it becomes the hold information that enables the determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  In addition, the game ball has passed (entered) the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entry) through the first start winning port and the second start prize port. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning due to this may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, start port data indicating which of the first start winning port and the second start winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The ordinary figure reservation storage unit stores the retained information of the ordinary figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate, and is used for determining the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are periodically set according to execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the display on the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 12-17(A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. Each of the first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw a letter "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display portion 207SG029A to the fifth display portion 207SG29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

  The display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 or the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

  On the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 12-17(B) and 12-17(C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for every 6000 balls out of the full game state. Base L that is (real-time value during measurement), base 1 that is a base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for each first out 6000 balls in all game states, and in all game states Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the second out-of-6000 ball normal state (low-probability low base state), and the third out-of-6,000-ball normal state in every gaming state (low-probability low base state) Base 3, which is the base value calculated in step 3, can be displayed. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 in percentage.

  When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 207SG029, in order to display "bL." which is an abbreviation for the base L, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of “00” to “99”) are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “1.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b1.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (value of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Further, when the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “2.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b2.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (value of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “3.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b3.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (value of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

  In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the main board 11 executes control for switching the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The display color of each base value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set to "5" is displayed, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, a clerk or the like in the game arcade can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029, without the CPU 103 executing the set value changing process described later. ing.

  Next, the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. 12-20 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017 and the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

  When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and when the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process to be described later was being executed before the power failure (power failure occurred during execution of the setting value changing process). It is determined whether or not (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is executed. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

  When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear processing for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

  In 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the lock switch 207SG051 being ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 being opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa013a).

  When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value changing process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 and the RAM clear flag is executed. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

  If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011;N) or the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012;N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

  In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up this time (whether the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed) ( 207SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the power supply to the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Recovery processing for returning to the state (207SGSa015) is performed.

  In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a command for restoration including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

  Further, in 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) or the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or the normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on, and the pachinko gaming machine is operated while the clear switch is operated. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processes of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above are executed.

  When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

  In addition, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a command at the time of restoration including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, the cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. 12-26(A), all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are set. Notification of cold start is started by starting blinking (207SGSa024).

  After the execution of 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027), and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of the segments forming the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

  Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to take a timer interrupt at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029) and the interrupt is permitted (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  Further, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 tells the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), recovery from power failure during setting change described later, and the like. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormal setting value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed. As shown in (B), a first display unit 207SG029A and a second display unit 207SG029B included in the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) of occurrence of a setting value error and recovery from power failure during setting change (error notification). , “E.” is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12-27(B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs configuring the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game arcade through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk in the game hall, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is executed to notify the occurrence of an error.

  In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the display monitor 207SG029, the first when the abnormal set value is set, or when the power is restored during the change of the set value. Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are executed to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk at the amusement hall, etc. generates an error from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and sets the set value. It is possible to recognize that the power was cut off during the change. In addition, since the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power interruption during the change of the set value can be recognized by the gaming machine management device, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Has become.

  Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or while the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clearing process (207SGSa009) is executed after the flag is cleared is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clearing process determines that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008. If the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y) instead of after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa02; Y or 207SGSa02; Y may be executed.

  FIG. 12-21(A) is a flowchart showing the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface processing. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the designated address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (FXXX described later) (207SGSa043). When the designated address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is designated (207SGSa044), and the designated address is the address (F002) storing the RAM clear flag. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa45).

  If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), the flow proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), the Address is designated and the process proceeds to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). When the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clearing process ends.

  In the RAM 102 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area, as shown in FIG. 12-21(B). Of these storage areas, a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and a second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 will be described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). At other addresses (F003 and later), special figure holding storage, general figure holding storage, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and game information including error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored. .. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating the factory shipment state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. Incidentally, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory shipping state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be changed. You may urge to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change processing by the display on the display device 5 or the like.

  That is, the RAM clearing process in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment is a process of clearing the data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in the address excluding the set value.

  Note that the characteristic unit 207SG in the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clear processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment) may be cleared.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the form in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is set in the game control microcomputer. By storing it in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing and reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted. The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. Incidentally, when the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

  FIG. 12-22 is a flowchart showing the setting value change processing (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value change processing, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments forming the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa052, see FIG. 12-27(A)). Further, the CPU 103, as a mode (a mode that is neither a big hit A, a big hit B, or a big hit C shown in FIG. 12-6) corresponding to the setting value changing process, only one segment among the segments configuring the round display 207SG131. Is turned on (207SGSa052a).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any one of the setting values 1 to 6 is stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. "1" is set as the value (setting value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any one of 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 as the set value (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

  In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

  After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer in a game arcade (207SGSa059).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). When the setting switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065, and when the setting switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062; Y), the address F001 of the RAM 102 is set based on the operation of the setting switch 207SG052. The contents are updated (207SGSa063).

  Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the setting value "2" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "1" is set as the temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the setting value "3" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "2" is provisionally set. A value that is one larger than the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a setting value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value. If the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 or the address stored in the address F001. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends (207SGSa067), and turns off all the segments that form the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether a temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). When the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and when the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; Y), further in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 is different from the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070).

  When the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is the same as the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and the value is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. If the value of the set value stored in the address F001 is different from the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is stored in the address F000. Store (207SGSa071), and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

  FIG. 12-23 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa102, see FIG. 12-27(A)). Further, the CPU 103, as a mode (a mode that is not any of the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C shown in FIG. 12-6) corresponding to the set value confirmation process, only one segment among the segments configuring the round display 207SG131. Is turned on (207SGSa103).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107). If the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start timer has timed out (207SGSa107; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa108). The power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value changing process described above.

  After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109) and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to the management device such as the management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa110).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are also displayed. All the segments that make up are turned off (207SGSa112a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments configuring the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation processing.

  Thus, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display device 207SG131, and the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second By starting blinking of the hold indicator 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like can change the set value or the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that confirmation is in progress.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing, among the segments configuring the round indicator 207SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing. Although the mode in which only one LED is turned on is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 are jackpot A and jackpot shown in FIG. 12-6. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to either B or jackpot C.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-27(A), at the start of the set value changing process or the set value confirming process, a mode corresponding to the set value changing process or the set value confirming process is performed. As an example, an example is shown in which the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 light up in the same manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 can change the set value. The lights may be turned on in different manners at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

  As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is opened with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. By turning ON the clear switch and the clear switch, the setting value changing process is executed.

  At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 12-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display units when the setting value changing process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated in the state where the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D as described above, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 being opened. By setting (clear switch is OFF), the setting value confirmation processing is executed.

  At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 12-25(A), FIG. 12-25(B) and FIG. 12-25(E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 12-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for a game.

  FIG. 12-24 is a flowchart showing the power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply disconnection signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). When the power-off signal is not input (207SGS081; N), the processing is ended, and when the power-off signal is input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the setting value information stored in the RAM 102 is specified. (207SGS082), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (207SGS083). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

  Incidentally, in the game control timer interrupt processing in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. After that, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

  Next, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

  FIG. 12-29 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and the CTC (counter/timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting.

  Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by 1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; N), the processing of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 is repeatedly executed, and waits until the command reception waiting timer times out.

  When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored to the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player information in the player information input process described later After the input of information is accepted, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the last time the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, the number of big hits, (207SGS409) while clearing the information including the number of times of super-reach, etc., and notifying that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-36(A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 on the image display device 5 are cleared. A notification image 207SG005M1) for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) of displaying the game effect lamp 9, emitting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. It is only necessary to notify that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  If the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A set value related notification process for executing notification of being in operation (notification of setting value change) and notification of setting value confirmation (setting value confirmation notification) is executed (207SGS412).

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-36(B) and FIG. , The notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting value is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state. The state in which the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is generally open, and a clerk of the game hall or the like who changes or confirms the set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in a state of being. In other words, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a store clerk or the like who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot judge from the display of the image display device 5 whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Therefore, as the notification of the change of the set value and the notification of the set value being confirmed, the pachinko game machine can be used by a clerk of the game hall to change or check the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may notify that 1 is starting in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state.

  The effect control CPU 120 also performs a first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body initialization for performing the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322. The process (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. It is designed to be executed (see Figure 12-35).

  Here, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-33 and 12-34. 12-33 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing operation modes of the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the production control CPU 120. FIGS. 12-34 are explanatory views showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and FIG. 12(B) is an explanatory view showing the control speed in the non-detection operation control.

  The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be capable of reciprocating between their respective origin positions (first position) and effect positions (second position), and from the origin position to the effect position (first position). The forward movement to the second position) and the returning movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display and the like.

  When the first movable body initializing process or the second movable body initializing process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not detect the detected portions of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332, that is, the movable body is movable. If the body 207SG321, 207SG322 is moved from the origin position for some reason (for example, during transportation or installation on a game island, or if the origin could not be returned during the previous operation (for example, when the performance is performed, the motor is removed). The movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 could not be confirmed to return to the origin or could not operate due to adjustment, failure, catching, etc. (such as when a movable body error (operation abnormality) occurred), and the machine moved from the origin position due to vibration. If the position is other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position, such as a position indicated by a black circle corresponding to the non-detection time operation control in FIG. 12-22), the origin is returned. To execute the non-detection operation control. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 toward the origin position.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

  Next, the control speed set when the production control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 12-34(A) and 12-34(B) are control speeds set by the production control CPU 120 to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the movable body 207SG321. , 207SG322 is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set in one movement section and the other movement section between the origin position and the effect position, one movement section In the case where the mode is different between the other moving section and the other moving section (for example, a section with a spring and a section without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or a case where the same moving section rises and falls, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 The actual operating speed of may be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there is a difference in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the movable bodies 207SG321 are different. , 207SG322 does not necessarily have the same actual operating speed. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, the size, weight, and weight of each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, When there are differences in the operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 12-34(A), when performing the actual operation confirmation operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate and stop at the effect position, and to accelerate from the effect position and then decelerate and stop at the origin position. That is, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for confirming that each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the effect position. Change from high speed to low speed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120, when executing an effect using each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, is the first speed minimum speed (low speed) and the second speed higher than the minimum speed (high speed). Since each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of and, even when executing the operation control for actual operation confirmation, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the minimum speed The movable bodies 207 SG 321 and 207 SG 322 are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is also faster.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are set to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operation speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, the operation is performed at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, the operation is performed at the maximum speed. It will be described as one that operates.

  Here, the control speed is set such that the operating speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration is the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when returning to the original position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 207SG321, by controlling so as to be the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control for a longer time than when stopping at the effect position. The origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 detect the detected portion after the 207SG322 is surely decelerated.

  As shown in FIG. 12-34(B), when performing the non-detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , Always control to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 causes the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control to be less than or equal to the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this embodiment). In the characteristic portion 207SG of the form, the speed is always based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation check operation control so that the speed is the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control. Control for operating the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is performed.

  In this case, it is unclear how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position. Therefore, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, the actual operation confirmation operation control is performed. If the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 returns to the origin position when it is operated at a control speed when accelerated, that is, at high speed, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected portion or move from a short distance. Since the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are returned to the origin position and their movement is restricted, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. should be operated at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control.

  Returning to FIG. 12-29, after execution of the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. Of the setting value or the setting value early change end flag indicating that the confirmation of the setting value is completed is set (207SGS415). If the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416). When the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; Y) Proceeds to 207 SGS 417. When the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process of 207SGS416 is not executed and the process proceeds to 207SGS417.

  In 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If it is (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419; Y), the setting value early change end It is determined whether the flag is set (207SGS420).

  In 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) which is the same process as 207SGS413. ) And the second movable body initialization processing (207SGS423) which is the same processing as 207SGS414, and the first movable body initialization processing (207SGS422) and 207SGS414 and the second movable body initialization processing (207SGS423) are performed. It is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed. (207SGS424; Y) advances to 207SGS427.

  As described above, regarding the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. 12-35(A), the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command (pachinko). The setting value change notification and the setting value confirmation notification are started from the time when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are performed. To execute. As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 207SG321. After the operation check is completed, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 12-35(A), after the completion of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification. When the command is received, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed, the first movable body initialization process is performed again. The second movable body initialization process is executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-35(B), of the first movable body initializing process and the second movable body initializing process, only the first movable body initializing process is finished and the effect control is performed. When the CPU 120 for use receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is still completed. When the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed in the state where there is no such a state, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are executed again after the second movable body initialization processing is completed. It is like this.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-35(C), the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command at a timing when the first movable body initialization processing is not yet completed. In this case, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed in a state where the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initializing process that are being executed are performed. Only the initialization processing is executed, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed again.

  If the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command have not been received by the 207SGS 411 (207SGS 411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error specification command has been received (207SGS 425). .. When the error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification processing (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error designation command is executed, and when the error designation command is not received (207SGS425; N), , 207 SGS403.

  As the error notification in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-36(D), if the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error identified from the error designation command is displayed on the image display device 5, Good.

  As described above, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start, the player information (the player information While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super-reach, etc., from the RAM 122, the production information (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super-reach since the last startup of the pachinko gaming machine 1) ) And setting value information (any one of the values “1” to “6” corresponding to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value changing state or the setting confirming state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 122. The existing set value information is overwritten (updated).

  That is, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a set value confirmation state, or a set value change state. There is.

  Then, in 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, and the image display device 5 receives the reception command. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the command is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-31, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5 as the initial design with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left. Further, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5 " The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5. ,” and “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example, “6”) advantageous to the player is set. When set, a decorative value is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as an initial design at a higher rate than when a setting value that is unfavorable to the player (for example, "1") is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set with a setting value that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "5" from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5. ”, “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (eg, “6”) advantageous to the player is set. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or the set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “1”) is set. In addition, the speaker 8L, 8R is used depending on whether a setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set or a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player is set (for example, "1"). The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

  Then, returning to FIG. 12-29, the CPU 120 for effect control sets “4” to the read-ahead restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the read-ahead notice effect in the first four changes (207SGS428). After that, the CPU 120 for effect control shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (207SGS431). In the activation notification processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is specified which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, The boot notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the boot notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start notification process timer is started, the start notification process is executed at the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. Notification may be performed.

  In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value check end notification command. Depending on whether there is any, the mode of activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-32, when a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received when activating the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 is received. When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  When a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same as the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  That is, the specific control in the present invention means that, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the CPU 120 for effect control emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the sound for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R. It includes both performing the output of B.

  Further, when the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds. The output sound C is output, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value change is completed). It should be noted that the light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same, The emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when a set value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a hot start notification command or a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Unlike the above, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a gaming machine management computer or each counter, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start notification when the above, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, and a setting confirmation state, a device for executing the start notification is common. Although there is illustrated a mode (in both cases, light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed), the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether the start is started in the start, the cold start, the setting change state, or the setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start, the image display device 5 is displayed). A message image is displayed at, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a signal may be output from the above-mentioned external output terminal to the management device).

  In addition, the notification mode in each device that executes the start notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are illuminated, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. In this case, only some of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

  Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is in an open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (for the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some speakers.) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, while displaying a message image indicating that the setting is being changed such as “setting changing” on the image display device 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started up at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or RAM 122 has been cleared, such as “RAM has been cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals described above, the terminals for outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, as a setting value change notification, a period until the setting value change is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received). A signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time) to the management apparatus, and after the setting value change is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management apparatus as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from a terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear as a RAM clear notification.

  When the external output terminal is commonly used for each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

  As described above, in the boot notification process, the boot notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The startup notification of may be executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as being executed when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives the command. You may provide the command which does not perform start notification.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. The form in which different combinations of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when the is activated is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as such initialization effects. The mode of the start notification and the combination of the decorative patterns may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part thereof may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, in any of the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start, is started by cold start, is started by setting change state, and is started by setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications are given. May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 12-29, the CPU 120 for effect control then executes power-off detection processing (207SGS432). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 12-37, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (207SGS441). When the power-off signal is not input (207SGS441; N), the process is ended, and when the power-off signal is input (207SGS441; Y), the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The included backup data is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

  Returning to FIG. 12-29, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis processing: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 12-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, a production random number updating process (207SGS435) that updates the count value of the counter for generating a production random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number, a player information input process (207SGS436) that receives input of player information, and a game. A player information output process (207SGS437) for outputting player information and a production information totaling process (207SGS438) for totaling production information are executed. After that, the processing shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429).

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the player's stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to generate a password (a password generated in an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receives the input of the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

  In the player information output processing, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. After the completion of displaying the two-dimensional code, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. In addition, the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone to transmit the player information aggregated in this game to an external server, so that the pachinko game machine is available. The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time variation display, big hit game, and super reach are executed. To do.

  Next, an effect control process process in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-38, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetching restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after performing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag. Execute the process.

  If the value of the read-ahead restriction counter is any of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is either "0" or "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452; Y), the value of the prefetching restriction counter is decremented by 1 (207SGS453), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177 (according to the effect control process flag). (See FIG. 7). By executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after the activation, execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and thus the variable display is performed four times. Although the form of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 starts the winning a prize determination process (FIG. The execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays by not executing (see 5).

  As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted over four variable displays. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game based on the fact that the game becomes possible based on the fact that the game is possible. The light amount of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set in the factory-shipped state.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-2(H), the effect control CPU 120 has the reach effect of the super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect, It is possible to execute the reach effect of Super Reach C or Super Reach D as the second suggestion effect, and when executing the reach effect of Super Reach C or Super Reach D, the super reach C or Super Reach D is executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, the present embodiment also includes Invention 207SG described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, the fact that the setting state is set is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, so that it is not possible to appropriately notify the setting state. There was a problem. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 207SG, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22),
When in the setting state, the information display unit displays a display that allows the user to recognize the setting state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27(A), the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process). If it is, a portion that lights up all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, since it is informed that the setting state is set in the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made.

Further, as a game machine described in means A of invention 207SG that solves the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22),
When it is in the setting state, the information display unit displays a display that can be recognized as being in the setting state (for example, as shown in FIG. If it is, a portion that lights up all the segments that form the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B),
further,
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a specific effect (for example, next notice),
First effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a first effect (for example, active notice) before the specific effect,
Second effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect before the specific effect;
A third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) third effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12, etc.),
The execution ratio of the second effect is
It is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-9). ,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (for example, see FIG. 8-9).
According to this feature, since it is informed that the setting state is set in the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made. In addition, the interest of the game is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON). Shifts to a confirmation state (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 12-23) capable of confirming the set value being set,
When it is in the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the confirmation state is displayed on the information display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27(A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process). If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, since it is informed that it is in the confirmation state in the information display section where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made.

Further, as a game machine described in means B of invention 207SG for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON). Shifts to a confirmation state (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 12-23) capable of confirming the set value being set,
When in the confirmation state, the information display unit displays a display that allows the user to recognize the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27(A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process). If it is, a portion that lights up all the segments that form the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B),
further,
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a specific effect (for example, next notice),
First effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a first effect (for example, active notice) before the specific effect,
Second effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect before the specific effect;
A third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) third effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12, etc.),
The execution ratio of the second effect is
It is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-9). ,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (for example, see FIG. 8-9).
According to this feature, since it is informed that it is in the confirmation state in the information display section where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made. In addition, the interest of the game is improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 3 of invention 207SG,
The display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display section during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 and 12-27. In, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state is Different parts)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 4 of invention 207SG,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the variable display section (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). (A part that lights up all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform suitable notification on the variable display section.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 5 of invention 207SG,
The variable display section is composed of a plurality of small display sections that can be independently turned on (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. Part),
As a display capable of recognizing that the setting state or the confirmation state, all of the small display unit is turned on (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (The part that lights up all the constituent segments)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the game machine is in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Further, as a gaming machine described in means 6 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that shoots a game medium to a gaming area (for example, a left gaming area 207SG002L and a right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game,
The information display unit includes a firing direction notification unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that notifies the firing direction of the game medium in the game area,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed in the firing direction notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27(A), (The part that blinks the right-handed lamp 207SG132 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable notification in the launch direction notification unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 7 of invention 207SG,
A holding storage unit (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) capable of storing information regarding variable display as holding information,
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage unit,
When in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27(A), A game machine characterized in that all the segments composing the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B in the value change state and the set value confirmation state are blinked) is described. For example, it is possible to make a suitable notification on the hold display unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 8 of invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state,
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device is in the first state in the advantageous state,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed in the number-of-times notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. (A portion that lights only one of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable notification in the number of times notification unit.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 9 of Invention 207SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game,
Detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
A state information storage unit (for example, an area of the address F002 of the RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, a RAM clear flag) capable of specifying the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection unit when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The game control means,
A first condition (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) including a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means is satisfied. While the game is being performed, an initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanied by erasing the game information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 12-21(A)) is executed. Is feasible,
A second condition (for example, a clear switch is ON and a lock switch) that includes a special state (for example, a clear switch ON state) of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means. When 207SG051 and open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial condition is executed when the first condition is satisfied. Initialization processing common to the initialization processing can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a RAM clear processing and a setting value changing processing can be executed).
Regardless of which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21(A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process). (No part)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be made common when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to accurately execute the initialization process based on the state information while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.
The gaming machines described in the means 3 to 9 of the invention 207SG applicable to the gaming machines described in the means 1 and the means 2 of the invention 207SG described above are the gaming machines described in the means A and the means B of the invention 207SG described above. Can also be applied to.

The present embodiment also includes Invention 208SG described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to appropriately leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 208SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22); ,
With game control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing),
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed on the variable display section (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27(B)). In the case where a setting value error has occurred, all the segments composing the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked)
According to this feature, according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in the variable display section that executes variable display, which is an important display in the game machine. Since this is notified by the display, it is possible to preferably notify that the predetermined condition has been satisfied but a predetermined error has occurred.

Further, as a gaming machine described in means A of invention 208SG for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are each ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed on the variable display section (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27(B)). In the case where a setting value error occurs, all the segments composing the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked),
further,
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a specific effect (for example, next notice),
First effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a first effect (for example, active notice) before the specific effect,
Second effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect before the specific effect;
A third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) third effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12, etc.),
The execution ratio of the second effect is
It is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-9). ,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (for example, see FIG. 8-9).
According to this feature, according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in the variable display section that executes variable display, which is an important display in the game machine. Since this is notified by the display, it is possible to preferably notify that the predetermined condition has been satisfied but a predetermined error has occurred. In addition, the interest of the game is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 208SG,
The gaming machine is described in which the predetermined error is at least an error related to a storage area in which the setting value is stored (for example, a setting value abnormality error). According to this feature, the setting value is set. It is possible to preferably notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which is stored and that the setting value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 3 of invention 208SG,
If an electric power failure occurs before the new setting value changed in the setting state is settled, an error relating to the storage area in which the setting value is stored occurs at the time of restoration from the power failure. Even if it does not exist, a display capable of specifying that an error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, even when the power is restored from the interruption during the setting change as shown in FIG. Part to blink all the segments that make up the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, it is necessary to re-set the set value due to the occurrence of power cutoff before the set value is confirmed without newly setting an error. It can be suitably notified.
The gaming machine described in the means 2 to 3 of the invention 208SG that can be applied to the gaming machine described in the means 1 of the invention 208SG described above can also be applied to the gaming machine described in the means A of the invention 208SG described above. it can.

The present embodiment also includes invention 209SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is one described in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with an information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding a given gaming value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and information display means for confirming the set value are provided. There is a problem in that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if these are individually provided. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 209SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where the prize balls are paid out by doing),
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and the base information shown in FIG. An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value),
Equipped with
The information display means can display setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-25, a pachinko game). When the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used is different between when the predetermined information is displayed and when the setting value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-25, the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029). When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used. When the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (A part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information about the game value, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. Since it is not necessary to provide each separately, the cost of the game machine can be reduced.

Further, as a game machine described in means A of invention 209SG for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming medium and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where prize balls are paid out by doing),
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information about the game value provided by the game value providing means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 12-17C). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value),
Equipped with
The information display means can display setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-25, a pachinko game). When the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used is different when the predetermined information is displayed and when the setting value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-25, the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029). When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used. When the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit 207SG029D is used only),
further,
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a specific effect (for example, next notice),
First effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a first effect (for example, active notice) before the specific effect,
Second effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect before the specific effect;
A third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) third effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12, etc.),
The execution ratio of the second effect is
It is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-9). ,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (for example, see FIG. 8-9).
According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information about the game value, the display means for displaying the set value information is provided. Since it is not necessary to provide each separately, the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In addition, the interest of the game is improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 2 of invention 209SG,
The information display means is capable of displaying error information capable of specifying that an error has occurred in at least the storage area in which the setting value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-26(B), When the set value abnormality error occurs, "E." is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of the display units used is the same when the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed (for example, FIGS. 12-25(A) and 12-26(B)). As shown in FIG. 5, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display are used for displaying the base value on the display monitor 207SG029 and for displaying the occurrence of the abnormal error. Part 207SG029D) (the part that uses the part 207SG029D) is described. According to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred regarding the storage area in which the setting value is stored, and to set the setting value information. Can be easily recognized as different error information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 209SG,
The display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be turned on independently (for example, each of the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D is 8). Part consisting of individual segments),
Equipped with detection means (for example, clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
The information display means, when the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means satisfies an initialization condition (for example, a clear switch is ON), the information display means includes the small units that configure each display unit. All of the display parts are turned on to be in the all-lit display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-26(A), the first display part 207SG029A, the second display part 207SG029B, the third display part 207SG029C, and the fourth display part). 207SG029D is a part that repeats all blinking and all extinguishing (flashing) of all the segments that make up the segment)
According to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display units are normal.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 4 of invention 209SG,
Equipped with detection means (for example, clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine at power-on
When the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detecting means satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display means displays the set value information without being in the all-lit display state (for example, As shown in FIG. 12-22, when the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to quickly confirm the set value.
The gaming machines described in the means 2 to 4 of the invention 209SG that can be applied to the gaming machine described in the means 1 of the invention 209SG described above can also be applied to the gaming machine described in the means A of the invention 209SG described above. it can.

The present embodiment also includes Invention 210SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that executes a confirmation operation of a movable body based on an operation of changing a set value, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-189349, if the confirmation operation of the movable body is executed during the change of the set value, the operator may overlook the confirmation operation. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute the confirming operation again after the setting value changing operation is completed. In this case, when the setting value changing operation is completed during the first movable body confirming operation, the changing operation is completed. There is a problem that a new confirmation operation of the movable body is started from the timing, and the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 210SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) operably provided,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When a specific condition is met, the setting means shifts to a setting state in which the setting value can be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, a clear switch, a lock switch when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON, the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing),
The control means is
When the confirmation operation control (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed when the state is changed to the setting state. It can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-35, the effect control CPU 120 actually executes from the timing when the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Actual operation from the part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing including the operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing, and the timing at which the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. (A portion that sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process including confirmation operation control),
If the setting state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state is not executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 12-35(C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (Part where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as a game machine described in means A of invention 210SG for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2017-189349,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) operably provided,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When a specific condition is met, the setting means shifts to a setting state in which the setting value can be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, a clear switch, a lock switch when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON, the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing),
The control means is
When the confirmation operation control (for example, the actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed when the state is changed to the setting state. It can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-35, the effect control CPU 120 actually executes from the timing when the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Actual operation from the part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing including the operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing, and the timing at which the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. (A portion that sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process including confirmation operation control),
If the setting state is ended while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state is not executed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-35(C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (A portion in which the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed),
further,
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a specific effect (for example, next notice),
First effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a first effect (for example, active notice) before the specific effect,
Second effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect before the specific effect;
A third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) third effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12, etc.),
The execution ratio of the second effect is
It is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-9). ,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (for example, see FIG. 8-9).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation. In addition, the interest of the game is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) operably provided,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. When the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed. Can be executed at the time of shifting to the confirmation state and at the time of ending the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-35, the effect control CPU 120 causes the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation From the timing when the start notification command is received, a part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation (A portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the end notification command),
When the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the confirmation state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 12-35(C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (1) Movable Body Initialization Processing and Second Movable Body Initialization Processing are not Performed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as a game machine described in means B of invention 210SG for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2017-189349,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) operably provided,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
A setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 12-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. When the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed. Can be executed at the time of shifting to the confirmation state and at the time of ending the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-35, the effect control CPU 120 causes the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation From the timing when the start notification command is received, a part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation (A portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the end notification command),
When the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the confirmation state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the confirmation state is not executed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-35(C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (A portion in which the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed),
further,
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a specific effect (for example, next notice),
First effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a first effect (for example, active notice) before the specific effect,
Second effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect before the specific effect;
A third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) third effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12, etc.),
The execution ratio of the second effect is
It is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-9). ,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (for example, see FIG. 8-9).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation. In addition, the interest of the game is improved.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, return operation control (for example, non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. Can be done before executing control,
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the end of the return operation (for example, the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process). In, the part that executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after ending the non-detection automatic operation control)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 4 of invention 210SG,
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the control means sets the state or the setting state when the operation state of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. The confirmation operation control due to the completion of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-35(C), the effect control CPU 120 has received a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command). If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during execution of the first movable body initialization processing based on the above, the first movable body initialization is newly performed after the second movable body initialization processing is executed. (Processing and second movable body initialization processing are not executed) On the other hand, if the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy a predetermined condition, confirmation operation control is executed due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state ( For example, as illustrated in FIG. 12-35(B), the first movable body initialization process based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command ends, and When the setting value change notification command or the setting value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are newly performed after the completion of the second movable body initialization processing. (The part that executes the movable body initialization process in order)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 5 of invention 210SG,
A plurality of the movable bodies,
The control means is
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing),
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all the movable bodies, and when the number of the movable bodies that have completed the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition, The confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-35(C), the production control CPU 120 sends a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during execution of the first movable body initialization processing based on the reception of the On the other hand, a portion in which the movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed) On the other hand, when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has ended does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the setting state or the confirmation state ends. The confirmation operation control is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-35(B), the production control CPU 120 receives a set value change start notification command or a set value check start notification command. If the setting value change notification command or the setting value confirmation notification command is received during execution of the second movable body initialization processing based on the above, the second movable body initialization processing is executed. (A portion for newly executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing in sequence after the end of)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.
The gaming machines described in the means 3 to 5 of the invention 210SG applicable to the gaming machines described in the means 1 and the means 2 of the invention 210SG described above are the gaming machines described in the means A and the means B of the invention 210SG described above. Can also be applied to.

  The characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, Included in the invention.

  For example, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, ordinary The embodiment is constituted by the symbol display 207SG020, the universal figure hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game information display unit 207SG200 need only include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

  In the characteristic unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process (setting value changing state) and the setting value checking process is being executed (setting value checking state). The 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B have been illustrated as being in the same mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process. There may be a case where the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit or blinked in different modes depending on whether there is a setting value confirmation process or not. By doing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a set value change state or a set value confirmation state depending on whether the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are lit or blinking. You can easily tell if there is.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, by turning on all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, The display mode (lighting mode) of the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B and the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, the display mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state (lighting Aspect) is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, if these first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol It is not necessary to turn on some of the segments that constitute the display device 207SG004B.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, all the segments and the round display device 207SG131 that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The example is one in which the lighting of one segment is performed and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and all the segments composing the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinked. Instead, in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is lit, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinking, the first holding display 207SG025A and the second holding display 207SG025B are formed. The blinking of all the segments to be performed may not be executed, or only a part thereof may be executed.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value changing state and the set value confirming state, only one of the segments configuring the round display 207SG131 is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is not limited to this, and if the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 12-6, the number of lit segments of the round indicator 207SG131 in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state is plural. It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the notification of the setting value abnormality error is executed using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an error notification LED, and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that the set value error has occurred.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The display monitor 207SG029 may not be provided in the machine 1. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 as described above, a display means for displaying the set value (or the provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided. ..

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body Depending on whether or not the initialization processing is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed, a new first movable body initialization processing or a second movable body initialization processing is executed. Although the mode for deciding whether or not to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process, It may be determined according to the operation distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. are set to be different from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Is not limited to this, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, the round display that constitutes the game information display unit 207SG200 The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it can inform that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. ..

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. are set to be different from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during game" may include different blinking periods, luminance, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. As the processing, the mode in which the non-detection operation control of each movable body and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start. From the time when the command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received, the non-detection operation control of each movable body is executed, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command The actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is informed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state by turning on or blinking the round indicator 207SG131 and the right hitting lamp 207SG132 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not the one, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 may be provided at a predetermined location of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, in the vicinity of the game information display unit 207SG200) with an explanatory note that lighting or blinking is performed. By doing in this way, a clerk of the game arcade who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a first special symbol display device 207SG004A, a second special symbol display device 207SG004B, a first hold indicator 207SG025A, a second hold. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of lighting or blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right hitting lamp 207SG132 as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or while the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clearing process (207SGSa009) is executed after the flag is cleared is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clearing process is not limited to this. Determines that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or not after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but determines that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ; Y) may be performed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 10F)
Next, the characteristic portion 10F will be described. The characteristic unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the above-described set value change process and set value confirmation process.

  FIG. 13-1 is a flowchart showing the setting value changing process in the characteristic unit 10F. In FIG. 13-1, the same processes as those in FIG. 12-22 are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. In the process of FIG. 12-20, the RAM clear process is executed in the process of 207SGa009 before the setting change process (207SGa013b) is executed. Therefore, at the stage of the setting change process (207SGa013b), no information about the game remains in the storage area. However, the RAM clear processing (207SGa009) may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y). As a result, the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the characteristic unit 10F, description will be made on the premise that the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 13-3. After the game stop start processing, lighting of all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa051). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 12-22 is executed.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 13-4. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 12-22 is executed.

  FIG. 13-2 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation processing in the characteristic unit 10F. In FIG. 13B, the same processing as that in FIG. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 13-3. This game stop start processing is common to the game stop start processing of FIG. 13-1. After the game stop start processing, lighting of all the segments that form the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa101). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 12-23 is executed.

  Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 13-4. This game stop end process is the same process as the game stop end process of FIG. 13-1. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 12-23 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure the time and period related to the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops the counting of these timers. The plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the special winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the special winning opening door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for measuring the interval period between rounds during the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of a round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

  The V lid opening time timer controls the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished to a certain variation state based on passing through a certain switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the certain switch ( It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid, which is provided in front of a sensor for detecting the V probability change) and is controlled to an open state and a closed state. In the V-probable variation game machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round of a plurality of rounds. Such an area where the V lid is in an open state is called a V winning area. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by the V lid opening time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning which determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 is a gaming ball that has passed a predetermined switch after the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state (the player enters the special winning opening and closes the predetermined winning opening just before closing the special winning opening door). A game ball that has passed through the switch is also determined as a V winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the valid period of the V winning, in which the V winning is determined to be valid, by the V passage waiting time timer.

  The electric-chu open time timer is a timer for measuring the open time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wings, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, but the CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state to when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state by the electric Chu opening time timer. ..

  The special figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The universal figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the ordinary symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal variable time timer.

  The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the fanfare production is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare production is performed as a production operation for informing the start of the jackpot gaming state after the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

  The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the ending effect is executed, which is a period for notifying the end of the big hit when the big hit ends. The ending period is a period in which the big hit ending process is executed, and is a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

  The CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a general figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like as timers other than the above timers. The special figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The universal figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is derived and displayed by the universal figure fluctuation stop period timer until the next variable display of the ordinary symbol is started.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 13-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop start processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is in operation (10FS010; Y), the attacker opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the attacker opening time timer is not operating (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011; Y), the inter-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012; Y), the operating V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013; Y), the operating V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the V passage waiting time timer is not in operation (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the power cable open time timer is in operation (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the power-chu open time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the power-chu open time timer that is operating is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the power switch opening time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the special figure variation time timer is not in operation (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the general figure variation time timer is in operation (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS016; Y), the universal figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the universal figure variation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends.

  If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is in operation (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

  Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of invalidating the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, a process of invalidating various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, a process of invalidating detection of various errors, It includes a process for invalidating the payout of prize balls. By the other process (10FS021), various processes are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 13-4 is a flowchart showing a game stop end process in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V lid opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is ended. If the V lid opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passage waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the power cable open time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the power-chu open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the active power-chu open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the power switch open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the special figure variation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the universal figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS036, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the suspended universal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the universal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timers are stopped (10FS039; Y), the stopped other timers are activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), the other process (10FS041) is executed, and then the process ends.

  Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, the process of enabling the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, the process of enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, the process of enabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing for enabling the payout of prize balls. By the other process (10FS041), various processes are validated and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 controls the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state. And stops the time measurement of the attacker opening time timer based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state in the setting confirmed state is subtracted to advance the game. Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state becomes Based on the completion, the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the interval period between rounds is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. You can

  As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled during the valid period of V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the valid period of V winning is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 13-1 to FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and thus the valid period of the electric chew opening time timer And stops the clocking of the valid period of the power-chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the enterable state in the setting confirmed state. It is possible to prevent that.

  As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the special symbol variable display is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display is executed. Is stopped, and the measurement of the valid period of the special figure variation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing this, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game by executing the variable display of the special symbol in the setting confirmation state. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 13-1 to FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the general-use variable time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbols is executed. And restarts the measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variable time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the variable display of the normal symbols is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

  As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare production is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the measurement of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare production being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

  As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, Based on the completion of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the ending effect being executed and the game progressing in the setting confirming state. ..

  As shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started. The clocking of the period of the fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the clocking of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing this, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game is advanced by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. This can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding the modification of the characteristic part)
Although the characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. included. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 10F is demonstrated.
To do.

  The game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of the special pattern and the decorative pattern has been described, but the special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a big-hit gaming state based on the fact that a game ball has won (V-winning) a special winning port (V winning port) It may be applied to a game machine (mixing machine of one and two kinds) in which and are combined. When the start winning to the second start winning opening is detected, the big hit determination is executed, and when the result of the big hit is determined, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result becomes the big hit game. The game control similar to the jackpot based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is the small hit, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is received by the special variable winning ball device for small hits in the small hitting game state, and the game ball enters the special winning hole (V area) and is detected by the predetermined switch, the variable for the big hit The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second-class big hit game control in which the prize winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds and becomes a big hit game state.

  In such a one-and-two-mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided for measuring an effective period in which a game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is determined to be effective. The CPU 103 determines that the game balls that have passed the predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device has passed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer are also within the valid period. The CPU 103 uses a small hit time timer to measure a period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined. Then, the CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting check state when it is in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state. Alternatively, the time counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing this, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is executed in the small hitting game state in the setting confirming state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-4, the same control may be executed in the setting change state. Good. For example, the CPU 103 stops clocking of various timers based on being controlled to a setting change state when the player is in an advantageous state, etc., and various timers based on the completion of the setting change state. You may make it restart the time measurement of.

  The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result or the off display result. Specifically, if the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result, stop the timekeeping of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. If the special display variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in a display error, the special figure variable time timer may not be stopped even if the setting confirmation state is controlled. . In this way, for the big hit display result that is in an advantageous state for the player, the timer is stopped to give a disadvantage to the player, but the timer is stopped because the deviating display result does not cause a disadvantage to the player. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big hit display result or a deviant display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, when the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the deviation display result, during the execution of the variable display of the deviation, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timekeeping of the special figure fluctuation time timer. At this time, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

  The timer control may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or not. For example, when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is advantageous to the player, various timers are stopped, but when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, various timers are set. It may not be stopped.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 10F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 10F includes the following inventions relating to the characteristic portion 10F described above. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and that can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing);
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. And restarting the time measurement of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

Further, in order to solve the above problems of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A, the characteristic portion 10A is configured as follows.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing);
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an attacker opening time timer) that measures the period during which the variable winning apparatus is changing to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. Stop and restart the timing of the attacker release time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
further,
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a specific effect (for example, next notice),
First effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a first effect (for example, active notice) before the specific effect,
Second effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect before the specific effect;
A third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) third effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12, etc.),
The execution ratio of the second effect is
It is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-9). ,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (for example, see FIG. 8-9). .

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage. In addition, the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, you may make it suggest a setting value with the aspect of specific production|generation and 1st production to 3rd production. For example, an aspect in each of the specific effect and the first effect to the third effect is selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and each of the specific effect and the first effect to the third effect is selected according to a set value. By making the selection ratios of the modes different, the more advantageous the set value that is set for the player, the easier it is to perform the specific effect and the first to third effects in the specific type of mode. . By doing so, there are many variations in the modes of the specific effect and the first to third effects, and there is an opportunity to estimate the set value by the appearance ratio of each mode in the specific effect and the first to third effects. Can be given to the player, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
Further, when the specific effect and the first to third effects are executed, the set value suggesting effect may be performed by the image display device. For example, a character is displayed on the image display device when the specific effect or the first effect to the third effect is executed, and the character is selected from a plurality of types every time the specific effect or the first effect to the third effect is executed. By making the selection ratio of each character different depending on the set value that is set, the more advantageous the set value that is set for the player, the easier it is for the effect by the specific type of character to be performed. You may do it. By doing so, the setting value suggestion effect will be performed if the specific effect or the first effect to the third effect are executed, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game time measuring means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on that, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on what you did, restart the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, V winning effective period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific region is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, V winning effective period). For example, a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer is further provided,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the setting confirmation state being ended, the effective period is stopped. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Restarts the measurement of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award timing means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols), when the specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state),
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided,
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Based on the end of the state restarts the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
Further, a normal variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a universal figure variable time timer) that times the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being executed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Start notification effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect,
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that measures the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the variable display result being a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In a special state, the game medium that has entered the special area is further provided with a special time measuring unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium is effective,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is performed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.
The gaming machines having the characteristic portions 10F(2) to (9) that can be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 10F(1) can also be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 10A(A) described above.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 11F)
The following inventions may be included as the characteristic portion 11F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing),
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award timing means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

Further, in order to solve the above problems of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A, the characteristic portion 11A is configured as follows.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing);
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 sets the valid period of the electric-chu open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state). Stop the clocking and restart the clocking of the valid period of the power cable open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state),
further,
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a specific effect (for example, next notice),
First effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a first effect (for example, active notice) before the specific effect,
Second effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect before the specific effect;
A third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) third effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12, etc.),
The execution ratio of the second effect is
It is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-9). ,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (for example, see FIG. 8-9). .

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented. Moreover, the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. And restarting the time measurement of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game time measuring means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on that, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on what you did, restart the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, V winning effective period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific region is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, V winning effective period). For example, a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer is further provided,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the setting confirmation state being ended, the effective period is stopped. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Restart the time measurement of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols), when the specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state),
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided,
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Based on the end of the state restarts the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
Further, a normal variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a universal figure variable time timer) that times the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being executed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Start notification effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect,
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that measures the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the variable display result being a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In a special state, the game medium that has entered the special area is further provided with a special time measuring unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium is effective,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is performed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.
Note that the gaming machines having the characteristic portions 11F(2) to (9) that can be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 11F(1) can also be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 11A(A) described above.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 12F)
The following inventions may be included as the characteristic portion 12F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing);
And variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information (for example, a special symbol),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and confirms the setting. Resuming the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

Further, in order to solve the above problems of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A, the characteristic portion 12A is configured as follows.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing);
And variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information (for example, a special symbol),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting) Restart the clocking of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state),
further,
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a specific effect (for example, next notice),
First effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a first effect (for example, active notice) before the specific effect,
Second effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect before the specific effect;
A third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) third effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12, etc.),
The execution ratio of the second effect is
It is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-9). ,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (for example, see FIG. 8-9). .

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented. Moreover, the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. And restarting the time measurement of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising stop timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variable stop period timer) that measures the period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped to when the next variable display is started,
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is Restart the time measurement of the period based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is specially determined based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. (Time stop of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and time counting of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game is advanced by subtracting the period from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state to the time when the next variable display is started. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game time measuring means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on that, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on what you did, restart the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, V winning effective period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific region is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, V winning effective period). For example, a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer is further provided,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the setting confirmation state being ended, the effective period is stopped. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Restart the time measurement of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award timing means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
Further, a normal variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a universal figure variable time timer) that times the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being executed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Start notification effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect,
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that measures the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the variable display result being a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In a special state, the game medium that has entered the special area is further provided with a special time measuring unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium is effective,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is performed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.
Note that the gaming machines having the characteristic portions 12F(2) to (10) that can be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 12F(1) can also be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 12A(A) described above.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 13F)
The following inventions may be included as the characteristic portion 13F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute an advantageous state control that is advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived. ,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing);
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
An ordinary variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that measures by a universal figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the ordinary identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being executed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

Further, in order to solve the above problems of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A, the characteristic portion 13A is configured as follows.
(A) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived. ,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
A state control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation processing);
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41).
An ordinary variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that measures by a universal figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the ordinary identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variable time timer based on the fact that the normal pattern variable display is controlled to the setting confirmation state, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the validity period of the universal figure variable time timer),
further,
Specific effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12) for executing a specific effect (for example, next notice),
First effect execution means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a first effect (for example, active notice) before the specific effect,
Second effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like) that executes a second effect (for example, a cut-in notice or the like) different from the first effect before the specific effect;
A third effect different from the first effect and the second effect (for example, character effect, explanation effect, etc.) third effect executing means (for example, effect control board 12, etc.),
The execution ratio of the second effect is
It is higher when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed than when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 8-9). ,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect (for example, see FIG. 8-9). .

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable display of the normal identification information is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented. In addition, the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player,
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changing to the open state, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer. And restarting the time measurement of the attacker open time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the period during which the variable winning device is changing to the first state in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses, whereby the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising stop timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variable stop period timer) that measures the period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped to when the next variable display is started,
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is Restart the time measurement of the period based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is specially determined based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. (Time stop of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and time counting of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game is advanced by subtracting the period from the time when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state to the time when the next variable display is started. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game time measuring means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state is completed. Based on that, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on the fact that the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer is restarted).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high, based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, V winning effective period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific region is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, V winning effective period). For example, a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer is further provided,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the setting confirmation state being ended, the effective period is stopped. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. Restart the time measurement of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, normal symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which a game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , Variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time counting of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols), when the specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state),
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided,
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Based on the end of the state restarts the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Start notification effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
A start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect,
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

  With such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that measures the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the variable display result being a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In a special state, the game medium that has entered the special area is further provided with a special time measuring unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium is effective,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the effective period on the basis of being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the effective period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is performed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.
Note that the gaming machines having the characteristic portions 13F(2) to (10) that can be applied to the gaming machine having the characteristic portion 13F(1) can also be applied to the gaming machines having the characteristic portion 13A(A) described above.

(Explanation related to the association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic part may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic part. The feature portions combined in this way or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to other feature portions.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 51 ... Lock switch 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control CPU
AK001... Clear switch 12AK001... Next notice icon 12AK002... Character A
12AK003... Next advance notice character 71AK001... Output amount changeover switch 72AKP01... Short initial control pattern 72AKP02... Long initial control pattern 74AKP01... Production control pattern

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect,
First effect executing means for executing a first effect before the specific effect,
Second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect before the specific effect,
A third effect executing means for executing a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect,
The execution ratio of the second effect is
The time when the first effect is executed and the specific effect is executed is higher than when the specific effect is executed without executing the first effect,
It is the same when the third effect is executed and the specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect is executed without executing the third effect,
further,
Suggestion production execution means capable of executing suggestion production suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A title notifying means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The game machine characterized in that the title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect.